Download PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual

User Manual
PQA300
Picture Quality Analysis System
071-0909-01
This document applies to firmware version 1.0
and above.
www.tektronix.com
Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and
are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, and Win 32 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
JNDmetrix is a trademark of the Sarnoff Corporation.
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If a product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix,
at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in
exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any
other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction
caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other
products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO
REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO
THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE
OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xiii
Contents of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting Tektronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
xiv
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1--1
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-- 1
1-- 3
1-- 3
1-- 4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1--7
Check the Shipping List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PQA300 I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composite Video Decoder Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composite Video Encoder Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables and Mating Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-- 7
1-- 7
1-- 8
1-- 12
1-- 13
1-- 17
1-- 17
1-- 17
1-- 18
First Time Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1--21
First Time Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Test Sequence Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-- On Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-- 21
1-- 23
1-- 23
1-- 24
1-- 24
Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2--1
Input/Output Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capture Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PQR Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luminance and Chroma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSNR Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-- 1
2-- 2
2-- 3
2-- 4
2-- 4
2-- 5
2-- 5
2-- 6
2-- 6
2-- 6
2-- 6
2-- 7
Getting Started
Operating Basics
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
i
Table of Contents
Signal Quality Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Quality Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Live Video Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Results Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Video Display Port for External Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Test Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Test Sequence Functional Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Video Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Captured Test Sequences and Results Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preference Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Front Panel, Controls, and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Editing and Keyboard Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Key Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capture Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decoder Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply Sub Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playback Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Back a Video Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Results Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Results Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External 601 Display Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preference Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Soft Key Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messages and Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
2-- 7
2-- 8
2-- 9
2-- 9
2-- 9
2-- 10
2-- 10
2-- 11
2-- 12
2-- 15
2-- 15
2-- 16
2-- 16
2-- 17
2-- 17
2-- 18
2-- 19
2-- 21
2-- 21
2-- 22
2-- 24
2-- 25
2-- 30
2-- 32
2-- 34
2-- 39
2-- 41
2-- 42
2-- 44
2-- 45
2-- 46
2-- 55
2-- 58
2-- 62
2-- 63
2-- 65
2-- 73
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Table of Contents
Reference
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3--1
Testing for Picture Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Digital Video Test Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composite Video Test Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capture Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set the Signal Quality Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Apply Sub Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recalling Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set up the Results Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Testing Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert the Device to Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the New Testing Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Space Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Full Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Full Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a User Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Learn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Model Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-- 1
3-- 1
3-- 2
3-- 5
3-- 7
3-- 12
3-- 14
3-- 15
3-- 17
3-- 17
3-- 18
3-- 19
3-- 20
3-- 24
3-- 24
3-- 25
3-- 25
3-- 25
3-- 26
3-- 27
3-- 27
3-- 28
3-- 32
Appendix A: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A--1
Performance Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical (Physical) Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-- 1
A-- 2
A-- 6
A-- 9
A-- 9
A-- 10
A-- 11
Appendix B: Software Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B--1
If an Application Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Using an Emergency Repair Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating an Emergency Repair Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using an Emergency Repair Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering the Operating System / Partitioning a New or Corrupted
Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reinstalling the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System Software . . . . . . . .
Installing the PQA300 Application Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Generator and Reference Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-- 1
B-- 2
B-- 2
B-- 3
Appendices
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B-- 4
B-- 12
B-- 12
B-- 12
iii
Table of Contents
Appendix C: Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C--1
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load the Impaired Test Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up the PQA300 System for Serial Digital Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unimpaired Sequence Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Impaired Sequence Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Analyzer DSP 601 Out Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Generator Channel A Loop Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analyzer and Generator Channel B Out Loop Through Connectors . . . . .
Option 1 Functional Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run Encoder and Decoder Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up the PQA300 System for Composite Video Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composite Sequence Test Using a 601 Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composite Sequence Test Using a De-embedded Ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composite Impaired Sequence Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Video Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-- 1
C-- 2
C-- 2
C-- 3
C-- 4
C-- 6
C-- 8
C-- 9
C-- 11
C-- 12
C-- 12
C-- 14
C-- 16
C-- 17
C-- 18
C-- 20
C-- 22
Appendix D: Packaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D--1
Packaging Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Packaging Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repackaging Procedure (New Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repackaging Procedure (Old Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-- 1
D-- 2
D-- 3
D-- 4
Appendix E: Video Test Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appendix F: PQA300 System Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E--1
F--1
Decoder Board Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder Board Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-- 1
F-- 2
F-- 4
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G--1
Tcl Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tcl Functions in the PQA300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tcl Functions and CPU Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Callbacks to User-Specified Tcl Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tcl Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Grammar Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced PQA300 Tcl Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-- 1
G-- 1
G-- 1
G-- 3
G-- 4
G-- 4
G-- 18
Glossary
Index
iv
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1--1: PQA300 system rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--2: Rear panel keyboard and mouse connections . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--3: Left side keyboard and mouse connections . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--4: The PQA300 signal I/O ports with Option 01 . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--5: Analyzer DSP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--6: Decoder module connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--7: Generator DSP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--8: Encoder module connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--9: PQA300 signal connections for standalone
serial digital signal testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--10: Option 01 connections using analog black burst
genlock (lockup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--11: Option 01 connections using serial digital
genlock (lockup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--12: On/Stby switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1--13: PQA300 system directory structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--1: Header Only striping (525 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--2: Header Only striping (625 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--3: Header Plus striping (525 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--4: Header Plus striping (625 format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--5: Striping pattern on a Header Plus video test
sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--6: Virtual front panel with soft key menus . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--7: Video Controls for playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--8: Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--9: Drop down selection menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--10: Generate Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--11: Encoder Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--12: Capture Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--13: Decoder Configuration menu with composite and
S-Video processing selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--14: Measure Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--15: PQR parameters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--16: PSNR parameters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--17: Signal Quality parameters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1--9
1--10
1--11
1--12
1--13
1--14
1--15
1--17
1--18
1--19
1--20
1--21
1--23
2--12
2--13
2--14
2--14
2--15
2--17
2--20
2--21
2--22
2--23
2--24
2--26
2--30
2--32
2--34
2--35
2--36
v
Table of Contents
Figure 2--18: Apply Sub-Region parameters menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--19: Define Sub-Region view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--20: Playback Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--21: Video Controls for playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--22: Results Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--23: Selection soft key for results type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--24: Measurement summary page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--25: Details display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--26: Signal quality measurement data screen . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--27: Graphical display screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--28: Legend window for graph displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--29: Trace color selection palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--30: Custom color palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--31: Captured video display with stripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--32: PSNR picture difference map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--33: Select a region of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--34: Function Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--35: The Save As file window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--36: Function edit screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--37: Typical Print configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--38: A typical printer properties configuration menu . . . . .
Figure 2--39: Page Setup configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--40: External 601 Display Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--41: Preference Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--42: Other soft key menu choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--43: Working directory selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--44: File Operations menu under the Other soft key . . . . .
Figure 2--45: Select Network Drive menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--46: The Save As menu for saving results text files . . . . . . .
Figure 2--47: The network selection menu for choosing the
location to store results text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--48: Display settings controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--49: Hardware settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--50: Encoder/Decoder diagnostics and Encoder
Auto-Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--51: Help system contents screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2--52: Progress indicator shown across the bottom of
the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
2--39
2--40
2--41
2--43
2--44
2--46
2--47
2--48
2--49
2--50
2--51
2--52
2--52
2--53
2--54
2--54
2--55
2--56
2--57
2--59
2--60
2--61
2--62
2--63
2--65
2--66
2--67
2--68
2--69
2--70
2--70
2--71
2--72
2--73
2--74
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Table of Contents
Figure 3--1: PQA300 signal connections for serial digital signal
testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--2: PQA300 signal connections for composite signal
testing using serial digital lockup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--3: PQA300 signal connections for composite signal
testing using analog black burst genlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3--4: Display Model Parameters menu for setting the
advanced PQR parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C--1: Initial connections for the functional check . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C--2: Connection for analyzer 601 Out check . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C--3: Connections for the generator Channel A Out
loop-through check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure C--4: Connections for the encoder and decoder
functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure D--1: Repackaging the instrument (new packaging) . . . . . . .
Figure D--2: Repackaging the instrument (old packaging) . . . . . . . .
Figure D--3: Placement of bottom spacer pad in inner shipping box
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3--2
3--3
3--4
3--32
C--3
C--9
C--10
C--14
D--2
D--4
D--5
vii
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table 1--1: Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1--2: Additional standard accessories for Option 01 systems
Table 1--3: Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1--4: Operating requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1--4
1--4
1--5
1--8
Table 2--1: PQA300 system functions and interdependencies . . . . .
Table 2--2: Soft key control behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2--3: Manual Correction value ranges and parameter units .
Table 2--4: Formatting codes used in the Page Setup menu . . . . . . .
2--3
2--18
2--37
2--61
Table 3--1: SMPTE RP 145 phosphor properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--2: EBU phosphor properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3--3: Rec. 709 phosphor properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3--33
3--33
3--33
Table A--1: DSP board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--2: NTSC/PAL Decoder board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--3: NTSC/PAL Encoder board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--4: System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--5: Rear panel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--6: Side panel interface characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--7: AC power source characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--8: Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--9: Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--10: Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A--11: Environmental limits and use classification for
safety certification compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A--2
A--3
A--4
A--6
A--7
A--8
A--9
A--9
A--10
A--11
A--12
Table C--1: Required equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C--1
Table C--2: Mobile+.601-525 impaired video test sequence results
and correction values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C--7
Table C--3: Mobile+.601-625 impaired video test sequence
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C--7
Table C--4: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired
sequence compared to a 601 digital reference sequence . . . . . . .
C--16
Table C--5: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired sequence
compared to a captured composite reference using Notch
processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C--18
viii
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Table of Contents
Table C--6: Mobile+ NTSC and NTSC No Setup impaired video test
sequence results for composite video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table C--7: Mobile+ PAL impaired video test sequence results for
composite video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table C--8: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired sequence
against 601 serial digital reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table C--9: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired sequence
against captured S-Video reference using Simple processing . .
Table C--10: Mobile+ NTSC and NTSC No Setup impaired video test
sequence results for S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table C--11: Mobile+ PAL impaired video test sequence results
for S-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C--19
C--20
C--21
C--21
C--22
C--22
Table E--1: Video test sequences for 601-525 format . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table E--2: Video test sequences for 601-625 format . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table E--3: Impaired video test sequences disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E--1
E--2
E--2
Table F--1: Decoder error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F--2: Encoder error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table F--3: System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F--1
F--2
F--4
Table G--1: Grammar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table G--2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table G--3: Advanced PQA300 Tcl commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G--5
G--8
G--18
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
ix
Table of Contents
x
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To Avoid Fire or
Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
xi
General Safety Summary
Symbols and Terms
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:
CAUTION
Refer to Manual
xii
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Preface
This manual describes configuring and using the PQA300 Picture Quality
Analysis System.
Contents of This Manual
This manual consists of the following sections:
Getting Started introduces the PQA300 system by briefly describing its
capabilities and its user interface. This section also includes the accessories list,
the installation procedure, and the first time operation procedure.
Basic Operation discusses the operation of the PQA300 system user interface
and describes the measurements, setups, displays, and reporting capabilities.
Reference provides details of how to perform the measurement tasks that the
PQA300 system is capable of doing.
Appendix A lists the performance specifications and limits for the PQA300
system.
Appendix B provides the procedure to follow in the event that the operating
system software needs to be repaired. Installing the application software and
loading the video test sequences are explained.
Appendix C provides the procedures for verifying product function.
Appendix D provides the repacking instructions needed for returning the
PQA300 system for service or shipment to another location.
Appendix E provides a listing of the 601-525 and 601-625 video test sequences
on each of the CD-ROM disks. The scene characteristics are also given.
Appendix F provides a list of system, encoder, and decoder error messages, with
their meaning and possible corrective action to take.
Appendix G documents the PQA300 Tcl commands used in the function scripts.
The Glossary provides a definition of unique or uncommon terms related to
picture quality measurements and the picture quality PQA300 system.
The Index provides page number references to topics in alphabetical order.
xiii
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Preface
Contacting Tektronix
Phone
1-800-833-9200*
Address
Tektronix, Inc.
Department or name (if known)
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
Web site
www.tektronix.com
Sales support
1-800-833-9200, select option 1*
Service support
1-800-833-9200, select option 2*
Technical support
Email: [email protected]
1-800-833-9200, select option 3*
6:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. Pacific time
*
xiv
This phone number is toll free in North America. After office hours, please leave a
voice mail message.
Outside North America, contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the
Tektronix web site for a list of offices.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Getting Started
Product Description
This section describes the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System. The
PQA300 system is a picture quality measurement instrument that is used to
identify and quantify picture impairments such as those caused by compression
and decompression of the signal.
Picture quality assessment as made by viewers is often subjective. However, the
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System provides fast, accurate, and repeatable
picture quality measurements.
The PQA300 system is a Windows NT work station containing task-specific
hardware modules. The complete system arrives fully configured and ready to
use. The installed software includes the application programs. The remaining test
sequences are supplied on CD-ROM disk for you to load when you want to
select a test sequence that is not stored on the hard disk drive.
Features
The standard PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System can determine the
picture quality of 601 serial digital video test sequences. With the addition of
Option 01 (composite video), you can test composite video test sequences.
You can use this system to do the following tasks:
H
Generate video test sequences in serial digital component (and with
Option 01, composite analog signal formats).
H
Capture video test sequences in serial digital component (and with
Option 01, composite analog signal formats).
H
Create generate and reference video sequences from your selected program
material to use for PQR and PSNR measurements.
H
Make PQR and PSNR picture quality measurements on captured and stored
video test sequences.
H
Compare results from multiple measurements.
H
Select an area of the fields and/or a range of fields on which to make picture
quality measurements.
H
Display live video on an SVGA monitor.
H
Display reference video, captured video, and result maps (PQR and PSNR)
on screen (with option LC), on an SVGA monitor, or on a serial digital video
display monitor (using the 601 serial digital output).
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 1
Product Description
1- 2
H
Display a selected field of the reference sequence, captured sequence, or
results map.
H
Set the brightness and contrast of the picture difference results map displays.
H
Display measurement results in various modes -- graphs, details, summary,
and picture difference maps -- with rapid switching through the results
display modes to compare data.
H
Designate trace colors for the results graphs.
H
Choose to apply preprocessing corrections to the detected gain, level, shift,
and cropping prior to making measurements.
H
Create function files that perform a complete measurement: generate a
sequence, capture and measure it, and display the measurement results.
H
Define preference setups that restore often-used application configurations.
H
Load reference and generator video test sequences from CD-ROM.
H
Store and retrieve results to and from a floppy disk, the hard disk, or the
network file systems (when connected to a network).
H
Configure system settings such as time-outs, measurement limits, and
display model parameters.
H
Enter control commands through the keyboard and with mouse clicks on the
virtual front panel display.
H
Print results and screen captures or save them as PostScript or ASCII text
files for later printing or transfer to other applications such as a spreadsheet
or database program.
H
Access online help for the system.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Product Description
Applications
The PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System connects to both the input and the
output end of the equipment to be tested. Special test video sequences are
applied to the input of the system under test from the PQA300 system generator.
The PQA300 system analyzer recognizes these test sequences when received and
captures the video sequence. It then performs an analysis of the captured
sequence by comparing it with the matching internally stored reference sequence.
One result of the analysis is a single numeric value of picture quality called
Picture Quality Rating (PQR). Using an algorithm based on a model for the
human vision system, the system contains the necessary dimensions for
evaluation of dynamic and complex motion test sequences; spatial analysis,
temporal analysis, and full color analysis. The system can display detailed results
of the PQR analysis on a field-by-field basis in numeric, graphic, or video
format.
You can also perform a PSNR analysis of the captured video sequence. The
PSNR (peak-signal-to-noise ratio), as performed by the PQA300 system, is the
ratio of the peak signal-to-rms noise observed between the reference video signal
and the captured test video signal. The system develops an overall summary
number for comparison purposes and determines a PSNR value for each field.
You can also display detailed results of the PSNR analysis on a field-by-field
basis in numeric, graphic, or video format.
Options
There are two options available to you when ordering the PQA300 Picture
Quality Analysis System: Option LC and Option 01.
Option LC
The Option LC provides an integrated display, touch screen, U.S. keyboard,
keypad and three--button mouse.
Option 01
The Option 01 provides the Analog Composite Decoder and Encoder modules.
This option allows you to determine the quality of composite video test
sequences and generate or capture video test sequences in composite analog
signal formats. Refer to Table 1--2 for a list of accessories that are added to the
system when you order Option 01.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 3
Product Description
Accessories
This section describes the standard and optional accessories for the system,
including special accessories that are added when you order Option 01.
Standard Accessories
The standard PQA300 system is shipped with the accessories listed in Table 1--1.
Table 1- 1: Standard accessories
Description
Part number
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
071-0909-XX
PQA300 system Application Installation CD-ROM
063-3477-XX
Emergency repair disk (use as described in the Windows NT System Guide) 063-3484-XX
Rackmount kit (sliding drawer style) with instructions
016-1691-XX
Standard North American power cable
161-0066-00
CD-- ROM set of 11 compact discs:
10 discs containing selected video test sequences for 525-line and 625-line
video formats.
1 disc containing impaired video test sequences in 525-line and 625-line
video formats with known and quantified impairments for testing the
functional performance of the PQA300 system
063-3483-XX
One low-loss 75 Ω double-shielded coaxial cable, length 72 inches, with
BNC connectors for use in video signal interconnections
012-0159-01
The Option 01 system is shipped with the items listed in Table 1--2, in addition
to the items listed in Table 1--1.
Table 1- 2: Additional standard accessories for Option 01 systems
1- 4
Description
Part number
One 75 Ω adapter coaxial cable, length 9 inches, with a male BNC
connector on one end and a female SMB connector on the opposite
end for encoder to generator DSP interconnection.
174-3916-00
Two 75 Ω coaxial cables, length 8 inches, with female SMB
connectors on both ends for encoder to generator DSP and decoder
to analyzer DSP interconnections.
174-3915-00
Two 75 Ω BNC terminations for use in terminating the passive
loop-through connections of the encoder and decoder modules.
011-0102-01
Two S-Video cables, length 72 inches, with standard S-Video
connectors on both ends for use in S-Video signal interconnections.
012-1554-00
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Product Description
Optional Accessories
The following accessories must be purchased separately. Any one of the power
cable options shown in Table 1--3 is provided at no charge when ordered with the
instrument. The optional power cord replaces the standard North American
power cord.
Table 1- 3: Optional accessories
Description
Part number
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System Service Manual
071-0914-XX
Rackmount cabinet conversion kit with instructions
016-1921-XX
Video monitor with serial digital component interface
User-supplied accessory
Power cord options
Opt. A1 Universal Euro 230 V
161-0066-09
Opt. A2 United Kingdom 230 V
161-0066-10
Opt. A3 Australian 240 V
161-0066-11
Opt. A5 Swiss 230 V
161-0154-00
Opt. AC China 250 V
161-0304-00
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 5
Product Description
1- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Installation
Read this section before beginning any installation procedures. This section
describes site considerations, power requirements, and ground connections for
your instrument. The input and output signal connections for picture quality
analysis are described beginning on page 1--12.
CAUTION. To avoid damage to the PQA300 system during shipping, retain the
original shipping carton for reuse. Shipping the PQA300 system in any other
packaging may void the warranty. Instructions for packaging the instrument are
located in Appendix D: Packaging For Shipment.
Check the Shipping List
Verify that you have received all of the parts of your system. Use the shipping
lists that came with your instrument to compare against the actual contents of
your order. You should also do the following:
H
Verify that you have the correct power cord for your geographical area.
H
Verify that you have the computer discs that contain backup copies of all of
the installed software. Store the backup software in a safe location where you
can retrieve the software for maintenance purposes.
H
Verify that you have a PQA300 system Windows NT Emergency Startup
disk in case you need to reformat the hard drive or repair damaged operating
system files or drivers.
H
Verify that you have all of the other standard and optional accessories that
you ordered.
Software Installation
All software is installed at the factory. If you ever need to reinstall it, refer to
Appendix C: Software Installation.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 7
Installation
Hardware Installation
The standard instrument is shipped in a portable cabinet. A sliding-drawer style
rack-mount kit with installation instructions is provided as a standard accessory.
A rackmount cabinet conversion kit is available as an optional accessory. For
proper cooling in all installations, allow at least 2 inches (5.1 cm) of clearance on
the rear and sides of the mainframe.
CAUTION. To prevent instrument damage from overheating when you rackmount
the instrument, the air temperature at all air intake vents (inside of the rack)
must not exceed 40 °C. For rack mounting, the product must be installed in
either the sliding-drawer style kit listed in Table 1--1 or in the optional rackmount cabinet listed in Table 1--3.
To prevent instrument damage from overheating in equipment rack or bench-top
installations, keep the bottom of the instrument clear of obstructions.
Before you can operate the product, you must connect the provided power cord.
Refer to Figure 1--1 and connect the power cord to the instrument. Refer to
Table 1--4 for the supply voltage rating and connect the other end of the power
cord to the proper source. Do not connect to any power sources other than those
for which the instrument is rated.
Operating Requirements
Table 1--4 lists the operating requirements. Refer to Appendix A: Specifications
for a complete specification list.
Table 1- 4: Operating requirements
1- 8
Requirement
Specification
Source voltage
100-- 240 VACRMS, 50 / 60 Hz
Steady State input current
6 ARMS maximum, 1.25 ARMS typical
Maximum power consumption
330 Watts max, 145 Watts typical
Temperature
5 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F), 30 °C/hr max gradient, noncondensing (derated 1 °C per 1,000 ft. above 5,000 ft.
altitude)
Humidity
20% to 80% relative humidity, non-condensing. Max wet bulb
temperature: +29.4 °C or 84.9 °F (derates relative humidity to
~46% at 40 °C or 104 °F).
Altitude
3,000 meters maximum.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Installation
Power
Ethernet
1
2
3
RS-232
COM Port 2
4
5
6
7
8
SCSI
9
SVGA
10
11
Keyboard
Printer
12
Mouse
Figure 1- 1: PQA300 system rear panel
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 9
Installation
Keyboard and Mouse
Connections
Connect a keyboard and mouse either to the rear panel connectors as shown in
Figure 1--2 or to the left side of the instrument as shown in Figure 1--3. Do not
connect to both. The keyboard and mouse can be plugged in and unplugged
while the instrument is in operation.
User-- provided
SVGA Monitor
PQA300 rear panel
8
9
1
0
1
1
1
2
Keyboard
Mouse
Figure 1- 2: Rear panel keyboard and mouse connections
1- 10
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Installation
Earphones
USB
Keyboard
Mouse
Figure 1- 3: Left side keyboard and mouse connections
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 11
Installation
PQA300 I/O Connections
The rear-panel input/output connectors (I/O) are shown in Figure 1--4. The
standard instrument rear panel does not include the decoder and encoder boards.
A detailed description of each of the connectors follows the illustration.
The composite video option, Option 01, consists of two additional modules: a
composite decoder, for conversion of composite video to 601 serial digital
format, and a composite encoder, for converting the 601 serial digital output of
the generator DSP into a composite video signal.
Decoder
1
Analyzer Generator
DSP
DSP
Encoder
2
3
4
Video
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 1- 4: The PQA300 signal I/O ports with Option 01
1- 12
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Installation
Inputs and Outputs
The Analyzer and Generator DSP modules are exactly the same. The channels
comply with ITU-R BT.601, ITU-R BT.656, and SMPTE 259M. The difference
in operation and purpose of the connectors on the DSP modules is controlled by
software.
Both DSP modules have the following connectors:
H
CHANNEL B IN -- 270 MB/s serial component input 75 Ω SMB
H
CHANNEL B OUT -- 270 MB/s serial component active loop--through,
75 Ω SMB
H
CHANNEL A IN -- 270 MB/s serial component input, 75 Ω BNC
H
CHANNEL A OUT -- 270 MB/s serial component active loop through,
75 Ω BNC
H
601 OUT -- 270 MB/s 601 serial digital component output, 75 Ω BNC
Analyzer DSP Connections. Connect serial digital video to be viewed or captured
to the analyzer CHANNEL A IN BNC connector. See Figure 1--5 for a simplified block diagram of the analyzer connections. You can use the active loopthrough CHANNEL A OUT connector to supply the video signal for the other
devices in the system or to view the input video using a serial digital monitor.
The analyzer 601 OUT connector provides a separate video signal that can be
applied to a serial digital monitor. The video signal from the 601 OUT connector
is determined by the selection made in the 601 Display configuration menu (refer
to External Digital Display Configuration Menu on page 2--62). The CHANNEL
B IN SMB connector is for use with the Option 01 composite decoder. The
CHANNEL B OUT connector is available for viewing the input signal on a
serial digital monitor or other purpose you choose.
Capture/Analysis DSP
601
601
DMA
128 MB RAM
Mux
601
601
PCI
C80
C80
601
Ch B In
Ch B Out
Ch A In
Ch A Out
601 Out
601 Serial In
From Composite Decoder
Loop Through
601 Serial In
Loop Through
270 MB/s
601 Monitor
Figure 1- 5: Analyzer DSP connections
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 13
Installation
Decoder Connections. The decoder module accepts NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or
PAL video in either composite video or S-Video format. A simplified diagram of
the decoder connections is shown in Figure 1--6. The composite video input is
available for connection to a following system from a passive loop-through BNC
connector. The analog input signal is converted to 601 serial video for application to the analyzer DSP.
The 601 serial video is available on both an SMB connector and a BNC
connector. The SMB 601 Out connector is normally connected the the analyzer
DSP 601 In connector. The BNC 601 Out connector is available for monitoring
the digital video signal.
The decoder module requires the standard video input. That input is mapped into
decimal 16 to 235 output levels (8-bit mode). Signals with lower amplitude will
cause reduced decoder accuracy; higher amplitude signals may be clipped.
The Decoder module connectors are as follows:
H
S-VIDEO IN -- Standard S-Video input connector, NTSC or PAL
H
COMPOSITE -- Composite video NTSC/PAL passive loop-through, two
75 Ω BNC connectors
H
601 OUT -- Serial digital 601 output, 75 Ω BNC
H
601 OUT -- Serial digital 601 output, 75 Ω SMB
Decoder
S-Video In
Filter and
ADC
PCI
Composite
BNC Loop through
Composite
Serializer
Decoder
601
601 Out (BNC)
601
601 Out (SMB)
to analyzer DSP
Ref In (SMB)
Figure 1- 6: Decoder module connections
1- 14
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Installation
Generator DSP Connections. The 601 Out connector is the generator output port.
Connect the input of the device to be tested to this BNC connector. See
Figure 1--7 for a simplified block diagram of the generator connections.
The generator can be synchronized to an external 601 serial digital source by
connecting that source to the Main In connector of the generator. The generator
free runs when a 601 serial reference is not connected to either the Channel A In
connector or the Channel B In connector. Free-run operation is typical for 601
serial digital testing.
When testing analog devices, the generator Ref In SMB connector can be used to
apply the serial black burst synchronization signal from the encoder to the
generator Ref In. This signal is used to synchronize the generator and encoder
modules to an external analog composite or black burst reference signal applied
to the encoder Genlock loop-through connector. Refer to Encoder Configuration
Menu on page 2--24.
NOTE. To avoid a synchronization conflict it is important to have the appropriate
connections made when selecting the source of the lockup signal. If you are
going to use the generator DSP serial digital signal for lockup, do not connect
the encoder serial black signal to the generator DSP Ref In connector. If you are
going to use the analog black burst applied to the encoder as the genlock source,
do not connect a serial digital reference signal to the generator DSP Channel A
In connector.
Ch A In
Generator DSP
Lockup
C80
DMA
601
C80
128 MB
RAM
601
Sequence
Generator
601
601
PCI
601
Serial Black from Composite Encoder
SMB Loop Through
Ch B Out
Ch A In
System Serial Reference
BNC Loop Through
Ch A Out
601 Out
Test Sequence Out to
DUT or to Composite
Encoder
Figure 1- 7: Generator DSP connections
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 15
Installation
Encoder Connections. The encoder module accepts the 601 serial output of the
generator DSP and converts it to NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL analog video
in both composite video and S-Video format. A simplified diagram of the
connections is shown in Figure 1--8. The encoder may be genlocked (synchronized) to either the 601 serial digital video from the generator DSP (free running
mode) or to an external analog black burst reference.
When Black Burst is selected as the lockup source, the encoder module extracts
the horizontal and vertical sync signals from the applied analog reference video
and creates a serial black burst signal that is applied to the generator DSP Ref In
connector. That serial black burst signal synchronizes the generator DSP with the
encoder.
When Serial Video is selected as the lockup source, the encoder 27 MHz
oscillator is synchronized to a 27 MHz clock recovered from the serial digital
video input from the generator DSP. The recovered 27 MHz clock is filtered
(integrated) to remove jitter, but there will be more jitter in the recovered clock
than is present with an analog black burst lock.
The Encoder module connectors are as follows:
1- 16
H
601 IN -- Serial digital 601 input, 75 Ω SMB
H
S-VIDEO OUT -- Standard S-Video output connector, NTSC or PAL
H
COMPOSITE OUT -- Composite video output, 75 Ω BNC
H
GENLOCK -- Passive loop through, two 75 Ω BNC connectors
H
SERIAL BLACK OUT -- Synchronization signal to the generator reference
in, 75 Ω SMB. The serial black burst signal is valid only when an external
analog reference is applied and Black Burst is the selected lockup source.
Connect the serial black burst signal to the generator DSP Ref In connector
only when an analog reference signal is connected to the encoder Genlock
loop-through connector and Black Burst is the selected lockup source.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Installation
Encoder
Serial
Receiver
601 Serial In from Generator (SMB)
Data
S-Video Out to DUT
Encoder
Deserializer
PCI
Composite Out to DUT
Genlock
BNC Loop Through
Genlock
Clk
Genlock
Serial Black Out to
Generator Ref In (SMB)
Figure 1- 8: Encoder module connections
DSP Module
The DSP module contains two TMS320C80 integrated circuits with five
processors each. These share 128 MB of fast SDRAM. The DSP module accepts
Rec. 601 serial digital component video inputs and performs picture quality
calculations relative to reference video stored on the hard disk drive. While test
video input arrives through the input ports on the card rear panel connectors,
reference sequences are loaded through the PCI bus. The DSP module also can
output processed program output video in Rec. 601 serial format. The analyzer
DSP and the generator DSP modules are identical. Their specific operation for
either analysis of the incoming signal or generation of a test signal is software
controlled.
Composite Video
Decoder Module
The composite analyzer is formed by the analyzer DSP and an optional
composite video decoder module. The Decoder module accepts NTSC, NTSC
No Setup, or PAL analog video and converts it to Rec. 601 serial digital format
for application to the analyzer DSP. Input can be in either composite or S-Video
format. The serial digital Rec. 601 output of the decoder is presented on the rear
panel to be externally connected to the analyzer DSP Ref In connector. A second
601 out connector is available for monitoring the serial video signal.
Composite Video
Encoder Module
The composite generator is formed by the generator DSP and an optional
composite video encoder module. As are the other modules, the encoder is a plug
in circuit board that communicates with the server and the generator DSP
through the PCI bus.
The Composite Encoder module accepts 601 video at 270 MHz and converts it
to NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL. The outputs are composite video and
S-Video.
The encoder module requires standard Rec. 601 input serial digital signals and
can be genlocked through the passive analog loop-through input.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 17
Installation
Cables and Mating Connectors
The PQA300 system serial 601 Channel A In and generator 601 Out connectors
require 75 Ω coaxial cables with BNC male connectors. Additional 75 Ω coaxial
cables are required to make the loop-through connections. The active loopthrough connectors on the analyzer and generator DSP modules do not need
terminations on the outputs if you choose not to connect them.
Either the standard PQA300 system or the Option 01 PQA300 system can be
used to test 601 serial digital video signals. Typical connections for serial digital
testing are shown in Figure 1--9. The generator free runs on its internal 27 MHz
oscillator. You may also want to apply a serial digital reference signal to the
generator Channel A In connector. The generator oscillator is then synchronized
to the applied serial reference.
Ch A in
1
Analyzer Generator
module module Ch A Out
2
3
4
SVGA video
module
601 Out
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
To SVGA
monitor
601 Digital video from
601 Digital Input to
the device under test
the device under test
(response)
(stimulus)
601 Digital video
loop through output
to a 75 Ω system
Figure 1- 9: PQA300 signal connections for standalone serial digital signal testing
1- 18
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Installation
With Option 01 (the composite video option) installed, additional interconnection cables are required. A coaxial cable with a BNC connector on one end and
an SMB connector on the other is provided to connect the generator 601 BNC
output to the encoder 601 In SMB input connector. Two short coaxial cables with
SMB connectors on both ends are provided. Use one cable to connect the
encoder Serial Black Out SMB connector to the generator DSP Ref In SMB
connector, and use the other to connect the decoder 601 Out SMB connector to
the analyzer DSP Ref In SMB connector.
Do not connect the encoder Serial Black Out signal to the generator DSP Ref In
connector unless you are also providing an analog composite genlock signal as
shown in Figure 1--10 and you are going to select Black Burst as the lockup
source. Use a 75 Ω termination on the second Genlock Loop Thru connector as
shown in Figure 1--10 if you do not connect it to a 75 Ω system.
Refer to Composite Video Test Signal Connections on page 3--2 for more
information on synchronizing the generator and the encoder modules.
Decoder
1
Analyzer Generator
DSP
DSP
Encoder
Ch B
In
Ch B
In
601
Out
601
Out
2
3
Composite
from DUT
(response)
Serial
Black Out
4
601 In
5
Composite
Genlock
Video
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Composite
to DUT
(stimulus)
Figure 1- 10: Option 01 connections using analog black burst genlock (lockup)
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 19
Installation
The connections for using the generator serial digital video signal as the lockup
source are shown in Figure 1--11. Connected as shown, the generator free runs on
its own internal reference oscillator.
Decoder
Analyzer Generator
DSP
DSP
Encoder
Ch B
In
Ch B
In
601
Out
601
Out
1
Video
601 In
2
Composite
from DUT
(response)
3
4
5
6
7
8
Composite
to DUT
(stimulus)
9
10
11
12
To SVGA
monitor
Figure 1- 11: Option 01 connections using serial digital genlock (lockup)
The coaxial cables to make the interconnections for the Option 01 instrument are
standard accessories with Option 01. Two 75 Ω terminations are also provided.
Use the terminations on the passive loop-through connectors when they are not
connected. On the decoder module Composite BNC connector and the encoder
Genlock BNC connector, use a 75 Ω termination on any unconnected passive
loop-through BNC connectors when an input signal is connected.
1- 20
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
First Time Operation
After you install the PQA300 system, it is ready to operate. Whenever you
power on the system, it goes through the Windows NT initialization process.
(For more information on the Windows NT initialization process, see the
Windows NT documentation.)
First Time Power On
Power on the PQA300 system for the first time as follows:
1. Connect an SVGA monitor for a display and a keyboard and mouse for user
command inputs. See Figure 1--1 and Figure 1--2 for the connector locations.
If you have the local control flat panel display installed (option LC), use the
local display. You do not have to connect an external SVGA monitor. You
can connect the keyboard and mouse either to the rear panel connectors or to
the left side connectors.
2. Press the On/Stby switch to power on the instrument (see Figure 1--12 for
the switch location).
Whenever you power on the PQA300 system, it initializes and starts the
PQA300 application without the need to enter a user name and password as
normally required for a Windows NT operating system.
On/Stby switch
Figure 1- 12: On/Stby switch
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 21
First Time Operation
3. When the PQA300 application starts, click on the X in the upper right corner
of the PQA300 application window to stop the PQA300 application.
NOTE. The PQA300 system uses automatic login with the user name of Administrator and the password of PQA300. No other user can log in while the
autologin property of the application is enabled.
If it becomes necessary to disable the automatic login, you must run the Regedit
(registration edit) program and set the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\ Winlogon\AutoAdminLog
value to 0. It must be reset to 1 to enable automatic login. See Configure for
Auto Boot Up in Appendix C.
4. If autologin is disabled as described in the preceding note, use the key
sequence CTRL + ALT + Delete to display the login dialog box. There are
three possible logins:
H
You can log in as Administrator and use PQA300 as the password.
This user can load software, change passwords, assign users, and make
the Windows NT system setups for the network.
H
You can log in as PQA300 without entering any password. Use this
login for normal use of the system for testing picture quality.
H
You can log in as Guest without entering any password. A guest has
only limited access to files and applications.
5. Set the PQA300 system clock to the correct system time.
1- 22
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
First Time Operation
Directory Structure
The directory structure shown in Figure 1--13 is created when the application is
loaded. The software files are placed in the appropriate sub-directory. The
program binary files are loaded into the bin sub-directory along with the
supporting files for the application. The analyzer is configured and ready to use.
Pqa300
PQA300 Vx.,Xisu
Figure 1- 13: PQA300 system directory structure
Installing Test Sequence Files
PQA300 system test sequence files are provided on CD-ROM compact discs in
601-525 and 601-625 formats. To conserve hard drive space for capture files,
load only the sequences you will use for testing. Generate files are approximately
102 Mbytes each and reference files are from 42 Mbytes to 49 Mbytes each.
Refer to Video Test Sequences in Appendix E for a description of test sequences.
To install video test sequences, perform the following steps. The sequences will
be installed in the D:\PQA300 directory on the hard disk drive.
1. Select the CD-ROM disc containing the test sequences you want to install.
2. Insert the CD in the CD drive; an InstallShield Wizard is activated.
3. Follow the installation instructions that are displayed. Refer to Install the
Generator and Reference Sequences on page B--12 for further information, if
needed.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
1- 23
First Time Operation
Power- On Diagnostics
The PQA300 system has limited self diagnostics to assist with failure location
and with the functional check.
The system performs diagnostics at power on; refer to Encoder/Decoder
Diagnostics on page 2--72 for further information on accessing the diagnostics.
Field Service
You can service the the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System yourself or
have Tektronix service the system.
The service manual is designed to assist trained technicians in module-level
trouble isolation of the PQA300 system modules. If you identify a problem
module, you can order an exchange replacement module. You will then have to
install the module and calibrate the system as necessary.
If you prefer to have Tektronix or a Tektronix authorized service center diagnose
and repair the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System, contact your local
Tektronix representative to arrange for service.
A field service or factory service technician performing the repairs will replace
the defective module, verify the the instrument functionality, and return it to you.
Defective modules are returned to a central repair facility for component-level
repair where the boards are repaired, tested, and recalibrated to support the
exchange repair program.
Refer to Contacting Tektronix in the Preface of this manual for information on
obtaining additional customer support.
1- 24
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Operating Basics
The PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System connects to the input and output
of the video system under test. The PQA300 system generator feeds special test
sequences to the input of the system. The PQA300 system analyzer recognizes
these sequences, captures them, and performs the analysis by comparing
captured sequences to internally stored reference sequences. The results are
displayed in numerical, graphical, or video format. The analysis method used
requires special predetermined test scenes. Determining the effects of the
processing techniques or devices on the video signal is the primary application
for this system, particularity in the area of product development.
The first part of this section describes the capabilities of the system. The second
part of the section, beginning with Virtual Front Panel, Controls, and Display
on page 2--17, describes the user interface controls and configuration menus.
Input/Output Capabilities
The PQA300 system has the following standard video input and output
capabilities:
H
Digital video input: ITU Recommendation 601 serial digital component
video (selectable for 601-525 or 601-625 format)
H
Digital video output: ITU Recommendation 601 serial digital component
video (selectable for 601-525 or 601-625 format)
H
Video reference sequence input: CD-ROM or computer network source
Option 01, the composite video option, adds encoder and decoder modules with
the following video input and output capabilities:
H
Analog video input: NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL in either composite or
S-Video format
H
Analog video output: NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL in either composite or
S-Video format
H
Analog Genlock input: NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL in composite video
format
H
Serial Black Out: 601 serial digital black burst (selectable for 601-525 or
601-625 format). Signal is present only when an external analog genlock
signal is detected.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 1
Operating Basics
Performance Considerations
The operational characteristics and the functional characteristics are used to
specify performance of the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System.
H
The instrument captures the test sequence in real time (30 or 25 frames/sec).
H
The PQA300 system analyzes (performs a measurement on) one test
sequence at a time. If you have selected to do PQR (Y), PQR (YC), and
PSNR picture quality testing, all selected tests will be performed before the
analysis finishes.
During analysis time, many of the PQA300 system functions are not
accessible. A list of function interdependencies is given in Table 2--1. In
order to access any other PQA300 system functions once an analysis starts,
you will have to abort the analysis.
H
2- 2
The performance of the measurement algorithms is verified using video test
sequences with known defects. The picture quality degradation measured by
the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System closely correlates to one or
more of the widely used subjective rating system such as Rec. 500.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Operating Modes
The PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System supports capture and analysis of
video test sequences and generation of video test sequences. Some functions
operate independently of the state of other functions, and some functions are
either disabled or suspended when a higher priority task is in process. Mode
interdependencies are shown in Table 2--1. The intersection of an Active mode
row and an Available modes column shows the effect the active mode has on the
other modes.
Table 2- 1: PQA300 system functions and interdependencies
Active
mode
Available modes
Generate
Generate
Capture
Capture
Measure
Function
Playback
Results
601 Display
Preference
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled2
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Measure
Enabled
Disabled
Function
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Playback
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Playback
aborts when
a capture is
activated
Playback
aborts when
Measure is
activated
Enabled
Enabled
Results playback halts
during
capture and
resumes after
the capture is
done
Results
aborts when
Measure is
activated
Enabled
Enabled
601 playback
halts during
capture and
resumes after
the capture is
done
601 Display
aborts when
Measure is
activated
Disabled
Disabled
Results
601
Display
Enabled
Enabled
Preference Disabled
Enabled
Playback
aborts if
Results is
activated
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled3
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
1
Function is enabled, but if the function script calls measure, an error is generated because measure is disabled.
2
Function is enabled, but if the function script calls capture, an error is generated because capture is disabled.
3
Function must wait until preference is loaded before it can start.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 3
Operating Basics
Generate Mode
The PQA300 system generator can output video test sequences from data stored
in the memory or on the hard disk drive. The video can be generated in either
601-525 or 601-625 format as Header Only or Header Plus test sequences. After
you have edited the function script file and have exited back to the Function
Configuration menu, you can either enter a new function name before you save
to create a new function or you can overwrite the current function file and retain
the same function name. Option 01 Composite Encoder further processes the
signal to permit the generator to output analog video signals in NTSC, NTSC No
Setup, and PAL formats as either composite video or S-Video (Y/C).
You can choose one of the following ways to generate the video test sequence as
described below:
H
Single Shot. The generator outputs the specified video once from the
beginning to end.
H
Continuous Looping. The generator outputs the configured video test
sequence continuously.
H
Loop Count. The test sequence is generated for the set number of times.
Normal operation of the generator is the free run mode with no external sync
required. If you have a requirement to have the generator synchronized to your
601 system signal, you can supply that signal to the generator Main In BNC
connector. The generator module then synchronizes its 601 output to the supplied
serial digital signal. The Option 01 Encoder Configuration menu also has a
genlock selection choice of Serial Video or Black Burst. A serial black burst
output from the encoder is applied to the generator Ref In input to synchronize
the generator.
Capture Mode
Capture mode permits you to capture and store video test sequences in system
memory or on the hard disk drive. The PQA300 system analyzer can capture test
video sequences in either 601-525 or 601-625 format. The Option 01 Composite
Decoder permits the capture of analog video signals in NTSC, NTSC No Setup,
or PAL formats from either a composite video or an S-Video source. Refer to
Capture Configuration Menu on page 2--25 for further details on using the menu
and making the configuration selections.
When the Capture mode is configured for test sequence capture, clicking the left
mouse button on the Capture soft key puts the PQA300 system into the “Waiting
to Capture” mode. The PQA300 system monitors the incoming signal until the
test sequence you specified is detected. You can specify a named video test
sequence or make the choice as “Any valid sequence.” Upon detection, the
sequence is captured to memory. If you have Auto Save selected, the captured
sequence is also stored on the hard disk drive.
When Auto Measure is selected in the Capture Configuration menu, the
measurements begin as soon as the test sequence is captured. The measurements
2- 4
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
made are those you selected in the Measure Configuration menu (refer to
Measure Configuration Menu on page 2--32).
When the Capture mode is configured to capture a user sequence (with or
without stripes), the Capture soft key changes to Start and the indicator in the
soft key changes to red. Clicking the Start soft key defines the starting point of
the five-second video capture from the live video input signal. After you select
the starting point, the label changes to Storing to indicate that the capture is
being saved to the hard disk drive.
Measure Mode
Measure mode executes the measurements you select on a specified video
sequence.
You can have the measurements start immediately after a capture or you can
defer the measurements. When you select Auto Measure, the PQA300 system
starts the measurements you have selected as soon as the test sequence is
captured. The Auto Measure selection is made in the Capture Configuration
menu (refer to Capture Configuration Menu on page 2--25).
You can choose to leave Auto Measure unselected. This is the default choice and
is called Manual Measure mode (Auto Measure off). To make a manual
measurement, the test sequence you want to measure must already be stored on
the hard disk drive (previously captured and stored) or in memory (the test
sequence just captured). Before you initiate manual measurements for a test
sequence other than the one just captured, you must specify the disk file
containing the test sequence you want to measure. When you start measure
mode, the measurements you selected are made on the selected video test
sequence.
Function Mode
Use the function configuration menu to define one or more tasks for the PQA300
system to do or to select a function to run. To avoid a resource conflict, do not
start a function that calls measure or capture during the execution of measure or
capture initiated from the front panel. During capture, measure is disabled;
during measure, capture is disabled. If the function calls measure or capture
when the feature is disabled, an error message is displayed.
Functions are the equivalent of macros (operating scripts) used in most personal
computer applications. PQA300 system function scripts describe one or more
actions the system performs without the use of an external controller or further
user intervention until the function is completed. Functions can be used to
reconfigure the system, take measurements, print reports, or for any other
activity that is controlled through the front panel soft keys or configuration
menus. See the Function Configuration Menu on page 2--55 for further information on using the function learn mode and editing function scripts.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 5
Operating Basics
Picture Measurements
The PQR picture quality measurements of the PQA300 system uses the
JNDmetrix human-vision algorithm to derive a picture quality rating for test
video sequences.
PQR Measurement
A just noticeable difference (JND) is a perceptually-based unit of measure for the
magnitude of difference between two stimuli. In JND units, two stimuli (for
example, an image sequence and a degraded counterpart) differ by 1 JND if an
observer can discriminate between the stimuli 75% of the time.
The JNDmetrix algorithm accumulates JND values for image blocks of 32 pixels
by 32 lines by 4 fields deep. The PQR (Picture Quality Rating) value for a field
is an aggregate of the JND values of all the image blocks in four fields. The first
PQR field value starts at field 4. Thereafter, for each field, the algorithm removes
the JND values for the image blocks for the oldest field in a block and adds the
JND values of the new field to the calculations to obtain the aggregate PQR
value for the new field.
The field PQR values are further aggregated to provide a single number, the PQR
for the scene, which correlates with observers’ fidelity ratings when viewed at a
distance of four times the screen height. This number is provided in the summary
results. The PQR values derived for each field of the test video sequence are
provided in the results in the details table and in the graph results display.
PQR values can be loosely interpreted as follows:
Luminance
Luminance and Chroma
2- 6
H
A PQR rating of 1 indicates impairments that have a small perceptual
impact.
H
A PQR rating of 3 indicates impairments that are almost always observable
but not strong.
H
A PQR rating of 10 indicates impairments that are clearly observable.
Measurements are made only on the luminance component of the video signal to
provide a faster analysis of the video test sequence. Measurement of the
luminance differences provides a good basis for comparison of picture differences in the majority of cases.
You have an option to make measurements similar to the luminance measurements on both the luminance and the chroma components of the video signal.
Chrominance differences have a small impact on the PQR of a scene, and the
measurement takes more time than making the luminance-only measurement.
However, the choice does provide a means to detect errors in the color channel.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
PSNR Measurement
The PQA300 system analyzer can make PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise Ratio)
picture difference measurements on the luminance component of the video test
sequence. A PSNR measurement is a raw, non-human vision system picture
differencing measurement. The PSNR measurement shows every difference
between the reference video sequence and the test video sequence, whether it has
an impact on the picture quality as perceived by a human viewer or not.
The PSNR (peak-signal-to-noise ratio), as performed by the PQA300 system, is
the ratio of the peak signal to rms noise observed between the reference video
signal and the captured test video signal. Refer to ANSI T1.801.03-1995, Digital
transport of one-way video signals -- parameters for objective performance
assessment for the recommended methods to obtain the PSNR of a video signal.
There is an overall summary number that is developed for comparison purposes
and a PSNR value for each field. These values are displayed in the results. You
can apply adjustable Pass/Fail limits to the PSNR measurement. The limits are
applied to the results tables and graphs to indicate when the measured values
exceed the limits you set.
Signal Quality Measurements
The application of PQR to a test sequence requires compensating for certain
levels of signal quality degradation. This requirement is to limit the effects of
time-variant picture differences so that the compression and decompression
effects (compression artifacts) on the digital video signal can be determined.
Compensation is done on the following time-variant picture differences between
the reference video test sequence and the captured video test sequence:
H
H
H
H
Colorimetry (gain or gain and level shifts)
Active picture size (cropping)
Spatial positioning (horizontal and vertical shift)
Temporal delay (alignment)
You can choose to make the signal quality measurements provided by the Header
Only test sequence or those provided by the Header Plus test sequence. Select
the appropriate test video sequence to generate, capture, and measure (refer to the
Measure Configuration Menu on page 2--32).
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 7
Operating Basics
The following signal quality parameters are measured:
H
Level (Luma/Chroma)
H
H
Gain (Luma/Chroma)
Horizontal and vertical shift (Luma/Chroma)
H
Cropping (Luma only)
Header Only Signal Quality Measurements. When you use a Header Only test
sequence, the signal quality measurements are determined from the striping in
the header sequence. The measured values for gain, level, cropping, and shift are
assumed to be constant over the entire time-invariant test sequence, as they
normally are in a stable system. The values obtained from the measurements
made on the header stripe are used in the preprocessing when comparing the
captured test video to the reference video.
The measured values for gain, level, cropping, and shift obtained from the header
are displayed in the Summary results table. The header striping begins 50 lines
down from the top of the fields, so the Header Only picture quality measurements are not affected by top cropping of less than 50 lines.
Header Plus Signal Quality Measurements. Field-by-field signal quality measurements of the captured test video require test sequences with striping on all the
fields of the video test sequence. When a Header Plus test sequence is captured,
the detected signal quality measurements for gain, level, cropping, and shift in
each field are used in the preprocessing when making the comparison measurements. The Details results will also have a selection to view the signal quality
measurements field-by-field.
From the signal quality measurement, you can determine if you have a stable
system with virtually the same gain, level, and shift throughout the test
sequence. Or, you can find you have a less than stable system where there are
significant changes (time-variant) in the gain, level, or shift across the fields of
the test sequence. The Header Plus stripes are positioned across the top of the
fields, so excessive top cropping can affect the Header Plus picture quality
measurements.
Preprocessing Selection. You can choose whether or not to apply preprocessing
corrections. The default choice is to use the automatic feature and Apply Signal
Conditioning is enabled.
Signal Quality Parameters
2- 8
When you apply preprocessing, you can choose how that is done and set the
correction values. Refer to Signal Quality Parameters on page 2--36 for
information on setting up the measurement. Two modes of applying signal
conditioning (preprocessing) are supported: automatic (Use Detected Parameters
selected) and manual (Use Detected Parameters unselected).
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Use Detected Parameters. The signal quality parameters obtained during the
capture of the test sequence are used for correction.
Manual Correction. You must specify the signal parameters to use for correction
and compensation used with the measurement for quality analysis. Default
values provide a starting point for the corrections.
Pass/Fail Limits. You can compare any or all measurement results to user settable
limit values. You can turns the limits feature on or off by clicking in the Use
Limits check box. When limits are used, an out-of-limits condition is indicated
in the results tables in red. In the graph, the limits are shown as dotted lines. The
limit lines in the graph can be turned on or off for the active results.
Display Modes
You can display live video signals and the measurement results in several
formats on the optional LCD display, an external VGA monitor, or an external
601-display monitor.
Live Video Mode
Measurement Results
Display Mode
The Live video mode allows you to see that the correct signal is applied.
When this display mode is selected, the results of the tests you requested are
displayed on screen. Refer to the Results Configuration Menu on page 2--44 for
information on setting up the results displays, viewing them, and for examples of
the results displays.
Graph and Detail Results Displays. Limits failures (if limits are on) are indicated
by red text in the table results displays. In the graphical displays, limits lines are
displayed along with the results data plots. Test results are time stamped along
with the test sequence name. Refer to the Save information in the Capture
Configuration menu on page 2--29 for information on the default file naming
convention.
PQR and PSNR Maps. You can display the resulting difference maps. You can
specify the choice of PQR map or PSNR map for display if both are available.
Display Switching. You can switch from reference sequence, to test sequence, to
the Luma or Luma & Chroma picture difference maps for rapid comparison to
determine problem areas in the video signal.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 9
Operating Basics
Video Controls. You can use the choices in Video Controls window (shown in
Figure 2--7 on page 2--20) to play, pause, and step the fields of the video test
sequence. There is a field number display to show the field being displayed and
to enter a field number to display. Selection buttons to switch between the
reference sequence, the test sequence, and the map displays are also provided in
the Video Controls. There is also a selection to assign the video controls to either
the internal or an external monitor.
Digital Video Display Port
for External Monitor
The PQA300 system has an ITU-R BT.601 output port that can be used to
support an external serial digital component video monitor. Use this feature to
view reference video, impaired video, and the PQR and PSNR maps in full
resolution. See External 601 Display Configuration Menu on page 2--62.
Video Test Sequences
Picture Quality Measurements can be made only if known reference video test
sequences are used for comparison. Tektronix provides a variety of standard
video scenes (sports, drama, film, and others) determined to provide useful
testing results for use with the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System on
CD-ROM discs.
These reference video test sequences are a key component in the picture quality
measurement solution and are available in both 525 and 625 formats that adhere
to the ITU-R BT.601 (International Telecommunications Union Recommendation BT.601) recommended encoding parameters for digital television.
For each test sequence sent by a signal source into a system under test, a
corresponding reference test sequence is stored in the PQA300 system. The same
reference sequences can be used for all PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System
units. There is no need to acquire individual reference video test sequences for
different units. However, when you are using your own composite encoder and
decoder with the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System to test a composite
video system, you will have to acquire a suitable reference sequence for your
system. Refer to Creating a Testing Reference on page 3--20 for an example of
how to do this task.
One or two of the video test sequences are loaded on the hard drive from the
factory. If a video test sequence you want to use is not on the system, load it
from the CD-ROM disc to the hard drive before you begin testing. The needed
test sequence is then available for use with the generator and the auto-measure
feature. You can load the reference video test sequence later if you intend only to
capture the test sequence using the “Any valid sequence” selection to capture the
test video. Refer to the Capture Configuration Menu on page 2--25.
2- 10
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
NOTE. Do not enable the Auto Measure feature in the Capture Configuration
menu if the reference video test sequence needed for the measurement is not
stored on the hard disk drive.
You can measure the captured test sequences at a later time after you load the
needed reference video test sequence.
The generator of the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System produces
component digital (ITU-R BT.601) reference video test sequences. Test
sequences to be generated must be loaded on the hard drive. Refer to Install the
Generator and Reference Sequences on page B--12 for information on loading
the files.
Video Test Sequence
Functional Requirements
Video test sequences contain program material similar in nature (detail, motion,
and content) to normal program scenes. A test sequence is produced by
superimposing appropriate markings (stripes) on a video sequence.
A properly formatted test sequence (with stripes) enables the PQA300 system to
derive the following information:
H
Test pattern present signal (trigger)
H
Test pattern identification
H
Test pattern type (50 Hz, 625 lines or 60 Hz, 525 lines)
H
Horizontal and vertical shift in Luma
H
Luma gain
H
Luma level
H
Luma cropping on all four sides
A test sequence that is not excessively cropped permits the PQA300 system to
derive the additional following measures:
H
Horizontal and vertical shift in chroma
H
Chroma gain
H
Chroma level
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 11
Operating Basics
Types of Video Test
Sequence
Header Only test sequences and Header Plus test sequences, in ITU-R BT.601
formats for both 50 Hz and 60 Hz applications, are available for use with
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System.
Header Only Video Test Sequence. Header Only sequences are indicated by the
lack of a + symbol in the test sequence file name.
A Header Only test sequence is a 5-second test sequence with a header stripe on
the first second. No markings are superimposed on the remaining 4 seconds of a
Header Only video test scene. Simplified models for 525 format and 625 format
are shown in Figure 2--1 and Figure 2--2 respectively. All video fields of the test
sequence are consecutive fields of video material representing the characteristic
scene in question. Beginning at the third second of the test sequence, 120 fields
are captured as the test signal.
In the Header Only sequence, the striping is superimposed on the video fields of
the first 60 fields for 525 format video or the first 50 fields for 625 format video.
The stripes begin 50 lines down from the top of the field and continue to line 122
in four bands of 14 lines each. The Gray coded striping in the first 8 frames
contains a 16-bit constant that is the trigger event. This coded trigger pattern
identifies the sequence and signals the PQA300 system that a valid test sequence
is arriving. Following the trigger pattern, the superimposed markings are
encoded with the frame ID.
The header frames also contain markings to measure picture cropping and bands
with markings to measure the level, differential gain, and phase shift of the luma
and chroma. These measured values for gain, level, shift, and cropping are then
used to apply correction values for the comparisons between the reference video
and the captured test video when the Apply Signal Conditioning feature is
enabled.
Trigger ID
8
Frames
Frame ID
22
Frames
Seconds 0
60
Frames
30
Frames
1
2
Header
3
30
Frames
4
5
Capture
Figure 2- 1: Header Only striping (525 format)
2- 12
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Trigger ID
8
Frames
Frame ID
17
Frames
Seconds 0
25
Frames
1
15
Frames
60
Frames
2
Header
3
4
5
Capture
Figure 2- 2: Header Only striping (625 format)
Header Plus Video Test Sequence. A Header Plus video test sequence is indicated
by a + symbol appended to the sequence file name. For example, a Header Only
file name might be cheer.601-625 and the file with stripe (Header Plus) would
be labeled cheer+.601-625.
A 5-second Header Plus video test sequence has 1 second of video with a header
stripe and 4 seconds with the test stripe superimposed. A simplified model is
shown in Figure 2--3 for 525 format and in Figure 2--4 for 625 format.
After the header, the markings are superimposed along the very top of the
sequence down to line 56, starting with chroma calibration as shown in
Figure 2--5. Each of the four different stripes in the 4 seconds of video after the
header is 14 lines high. The Gray coded numbers in the stripes represent the
consecutive field count. The 10-bit Gray code is embedded within the chroma
calibration band. The field counter checks Header Plus video sequences to detect
missing or duplicate fields during a capture.
All the fields of the test sequence are consecutive fields of video. As with the
Header Only sequence, the third and fourth seconds (120 fields) are captured as
the test signal. For 625 formats, a little more than the third and fourth seconds
are captured to get 120 fields.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 13
Operating Basics
Trigger ID
8
Frames
Frame ID
22
Frames
Seconds 0
60
Frames
30
Frames
1
2
Header
3
30
Frames
4
5
Capture
Figure 2- 3: Header Plus striping (525 format)
Trigger ID
8
Frames
Frame ID
17
Frames
Seconds 0
25
Frames
1
15
Frames
60
Frames
2
Header
3
4
5
Capture
Figure 2- 4: Header Plus striping (625 format)
The gain, level, shift, and cropping values used for compensating the picture
quality comparisons are those detected from the test stripe in the fields of the
captured test sequence. If severe cropping eliminates all or part of the test stripes
in the captured test sequence, the values obtained from the header striping can
still be used to compensate the picture quality measurements.
2- 14
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Top crop
mark
Chroma background
Cb
Cr
Chroma G/L/S
Sequence ID/count
Luma background
with horizontal crop
Luma background
Bottom
crop mark
Figure 2- 5: Striping pattern on a Header Plus video test sequence
Captured Test Sequences and Results Storage
There is an automatic save selection that stores each captured test sequence to the
hard disk. You can choose not to save automatically and then save manually only
those sequences you want stored to a hard disk file. Refer to Capture Configuration Menu on page 2--25 and Capture Configuration on page 3--7 for further
information. These stored test sequences can be retrieved to make measurements
at a later time. Measurement results files can also be stored and then retrieved for
viewing.
Printing a Report
You can print displayed information, test reports, and measurement values on a
local printer or on any network printer that is accessible when the PQA300
system is connected to a network. The printed report page can be formatted with
a title, test name, test comments, and date and time. Refer to Print Configuration
Menu on page 2--58 for further information.
You can also send files to the internal hard disk. These files can contain
displayed information, test reports, and measurement values. PostScript and bit
map file formats are supported under the Print soft key. Selection of the format
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 15
Operating Basics
depends on the properties and capabilities of the installed system printers and
printer drivers.
You can also save results text files in ASCII format to the internal hard disk or to
any disk drive to which you have access through a network. The Save Values to
Disk selection is one of the choices under the Other soft key. Refer to the Other
Soft Key Choices on page 2--65.
Creating a Function
You can create functions to perform a task or a task list. Use Learn mode to
create a command file based on the control settings and menu selections you
make to do a task; then name and save the function file. Use the function edit
feature to add or delete commands from a function file to either create new a
function file (with a new name) or to change the existing function file (overwrite
the existing file name).
You can also use any suitable editor to create an ASCII text function file to
import to the PQA300 system function library using the file transfer capabilities
of either the or the PQA300 system. The function files are a set of Tcl
commands. You can add other Tcl commands to set up looping, branching, or
other conditions not obtainable using the Learn mode. Refer to the Function
Configuration Menu on page 2--55 for further information.
Preference Preset
The PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System supports saving and recalling
instrument configuration setups. A preference preset file contains all of the static
configuration elements defining the PQA300 system behavior. Once it is saved
to the preference directory, a preset file can be used to restore that configuration
of the instrument settings.
One preset is installed at the factory and another is created at shutdown of the
PQA300 application. These presets are called factory and shutdown. The factory
preset is a read-only file, which is used to set up the PQA300 system for factory
and service testing procedures. You can use the factory preset to remove any
settings remaining from previous operation and begin a new setup with known
settings. After making new configuration settings, give the preset a new name
and save it to make a new preference preset.
At shutdown of the PQA300 system application, the present settings are saved in
a preference preset file called shutdown. Those settings are restored the next time
the application starts, provided the shutdown preset is the selected preference
preset for startup. For additional information on creating and activating
Preference presets, refer to Preference Configuration Menu on page 2--63.
2- 16
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Virtual Front Panel, Controls, and Display
The virtual front panel, shown in Figure 2--6 with menus, and other configuration control panels can be used to configure and operate the system. All controls
can be selected and activated using the mouse.
Start or stop
associated function
Place the cursor in the
status bar and use the left
mouse button to toggle the
menu soft keys on or off.
Select the
next results
See the
choices
Display the
configuration menu
This area displays a progress
indicator, PQR or PSNR value,
sequence type, and frame number.
Figure 2- 6: Virtual front panel with soft key menus
Text Editing and
Keyboard Controls
You can use the keyboard or front-panel keypad to enter file names, directory
locations, and alpha or numeric variables. You can also edit any parameter field
in the configuration menus permitting alpha or numeric entries.
H
The tab and shift-tab keys select buttons in the configuration menus.
H
The enter key activates a selected button. A small outline appears around the
button label when the button is selected.
H
The arrow keys step selected parameters up and down or position the vertical
cursor in the graphical results display.
H
The Esc button exits an active configuration menu.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 17
Operating Basics
Soft Key Controls
The main control soft keys located to the right of and below the display provide
access to the various configuration menus and processes. These menus are used
to control the operation of the PQA300 system and to make any configuration
changes to the parameters that control the various modes of operation. You can
remove the soft keys from the display by clicking in the bar at the bottom of the
PQA300 system screen. Click in the bar again to make the soft keys reappear.
Click the left mouse button on the soft key to start or stop the associated
function. Click the right mouse button on the soft key to bring up the configuration menu associated with the function.
NOTE. When you click a soft key to start a process, if the configuration for that
process is not correct, the system will display an error message. Correct the
configuration and click the soft key again to start the process.
Soft Key Behavior. Most of the main menu soft keys have left mouse button and
right mouse button selections. A click of the left mouse button activates or
toggles a specific feature. A small indicator in the soft key is turned on when the
activity associated with that soft key is running.
A click of the right mouse button on the major function soft keys displays the
configuration menu associated with the soft key. (A press and hold of the left
mouse button for longer than about 1 second has the same result as clicking the
right mouse button.) Three of the soft keys have alternate labels when used to
control activities initiated in the configuration menu. These soft keys are
Capture, Measure, and Function. The soft key functions are shown in Table 2--2.
Table 2- 2: Soft key control behavior
2- 18
Soft key name
Left mouse button click
Right mouse button click
Generate
Activate or terminate a generate task
Display Generate Configuration
menu
Capture
(Start)
Activate or terminate a capture task
Start capturing a user sequence for
striping
Display Capture Configuration menu
Measure
(Set Region)
Activate or terminate a measurement
task
Set crop limits for a defined sub
region
Display Measure Configuration menu
Function
(Learning)
Activate or terminate a function task
Start and stop a Learn Mode function
creation
Display Function Configuration menu
Print
Displays the Print setup menu
Display Page Setup menu
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Table 2- 2: Soft key control behavior (cont.)
Soft key name
Left mouse button click
Right mouse button click
Summary/DeCycle through the measurement
tail/Graph/Video results displays. The label on the soft
key changes to show the results type
being displayed.
Display a popup menu showing the
results displays choices you can
select. Grayed choices are unavailable for the present application.
Preference
Restore the user preference setup
(any in-process activity is terminated)
Display Preference Configuration
menu
601 Display
Activate or terminate the external
monitor display
Display External 601 Display Configuration menu
Results
Activate or terminate a results display
activity
Display Result Configuration menu
Playback
Activate or terminate a playback
activity
Display Playback Configuration
menu
Other
Access menu choices: Video Controls Same as a left mouse button click
on/off, View Graph Legend on/off,
View Transcript, Working Directory,
File Operations, Update Database,
Display Settings, Hardware Settings
and Diagnostics, Save Values to Disk,
Help, Minimize, and Exit
Display
You can view the PQA300 system interface on either the integrated display
screen (if you order your system with an option LC or install an upgrade kit
PQA3FLC) or an external SVGA monitor that you provide. Figure 2--8 shows
the PQA300 system with the integrated display installed.
You can connect a serial digital component video monitor to the 601 digital
picture monitor output to view the PQR and PSNR picture difference maps at
full resolution. In addition, you can view input signals and captured signals in
full digital component video resolution. You can configure the external digital
picture monitor display (refer to External 601 Display Configuration Menu on
page 2--62).
Views
In each of the four measurement views (summary, detail, graph, video), the
sequence name, the measurement name (PQR, PSNR), and the format (601-525,
601-625, NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL) are displayed for the current test
sequence.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 19
Operating Basics
Video Sequences
You can select live video, a captured video sequence, or a stored video sequence
file to display using the configuration menu choices associated with the Playback
soft key (refer to Playback Configuration Menu on page 2--41).
When a captured or file video sequence is displayed, a video controls window is
also displayed (see Figure 2--7). The video controls are similar to VCR controls
that permit you to go to the end or beginning, pause, step forward, step
backward, and play the sequence forward or backwards.
A field readout in the box shows you exactly which field of the 120 field test
sequence is being displayed. You can directly enter a field number to view by
clicking in the readout window and entering the field number from the keyboard.
The playback goes to Pause when you click in the field number window. As soon
as another valid number is recognized, the field is switched to that number. Click
and hold on the field advance button (either direction) to step field-by-field in
two-fifths of a second intervals. Use the monitor selection buttons (INT and
EXT) to select which display the video controls are associated with.
You can turn the video controls display on or off using a selection under the
Other soft key (refer to Other Soft Key Choices on page 2--65).
Select PQR or PSNR
Luma & Chroma Map
Pause
Run
Luma Map
Monitor
association
Run
Test Image
Reference Image
Field No.
Go to End
Advance Field
Step Back Field
Go to Beginning
Figure 2- 7: Video Controls for playback
Results Displays
2- 20
You can view measurement results as a summary, as field-by-field details, as a
graphical display, or as a video picture difference sequence. You can use the
measurement results to determine overall picture quality or to examine specific
fields of a video sequence for problem areas. For setting up the results displays,
refer to Results Configuration Menu on page 2--44.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Front Panel Controls
The soft keys, the mouse and keyboard provide the main interface for instrument
functions, as described in Virtual Front Panel, Controls, and Display on
page 2--17. Many of these same functions are available using the front-panel
controls, however not all front-panel controls are enabled.
Keypad
Floppy disk drive
(standard)
CD-ROM drive
(standard)
Touch screen
Figure 2- 8: Front Panel Controls
Configuration Menus
All configuration menus are accessed by a click of the right mouse button (or a
long click and hold of the left mouse button). Refer to Soft Key Controls on
page 2--18. The following information describes the configuration menus and the
configuration choices you can make. In the standard instrument configuration
(serial digital video only), soft keys that access features provided by Option 01
(the composite video option) are grayed out.
To make selections in the configuration menus, you use selection buttons, check
boxes, edit fields for file names, and drop-down selection lists as shown in
Figure 2--9. To display a selection list, click the down arrow next to the name
field. To choose a selection in the displayed list, place the mouse cursor on the
choice and click the left mouse button.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 21
Operating Basics
Ferris+
Flower+
Figure 2- 9: Drop down selection menu
To operate a selection button (turn the choice on or off) place the mouse cursor in
the button area and click the left mouse button. Toggle a check box on (checked)
or off (not checked) by placing the mouse cursor in the check box and clicking
the left mouse button. To edit file names, limits, or path names, and other
editable fields, click the mouse cursor in the edit field and use the keyboard
editing controls to make changes.
To exit a configuration menu, you have the following options:
Generate Configuration
Menu
2- 22
H
click the OK button to accept configuration changes. The changes are
accepted, and the menu window is closed. Most of the configuration changes
you make remain in effect until you change them, either directly or by
restoring the factory defaults.
H
click the Cancel button to exit the menu without accepting any configuration
changes.
H
click the X in the label bar for the screen to exit the menu without accepting
changes (same as Cancel).
Use the Generate Configuration menu to select the sequence to send. Access the
Generate Configuration menu by clicking the right mouse button on the Generate
soft key. This displays the dialog screen shown in Figure 2--10. Refer to
Generator Configuration on page 3--5 for more information.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 10: Generate Configuration menu
Selection
Task to perform
Sequence
Choose one of the video test sequences to be generated. Click the
down-arrow indicator next to the Sequence name field to display the
drop-down menu of choices and select the test sequence to generate.
Specify the type of test sequence to be generated by selecting a Header
Only sequence (for example, Ferris) or Header Plus striping sequence (for
example, Ferris+).
With a stable system under test, the usual choice would be to use a Header
Only test sequence. You would use the Header Plus sequence to determine
if the system under test is stable and for making measurements when the
system under test displays less than stable operation.
Signal Type
Specify the output signal format (601-525, 601-625, NTSC, NTSC No Setup,
or PAL). Click the arrow indicator next to the Signal Type name field to
display the drop-down menu of choices and select the signal type to
generate. Only the 601 formats are available in the standard instrument.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 23
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Behavior
Choose to generate the selected video sequence in one of the three
following modes:
Single Shot. Sends the selected video sequence one time. When
sending NTSC or PAL video sequences, use Continuous Looping.
Continuous Looping. Loops the selected video sequence until
generation is stopped. When generating NTSC or PAL video sequence
each sequence is sent in a different color phase. All possible color
phases for the selected format (NTSC or PAL) are sent. The analyzer
looks for and captures the sequence with the color phase that matches
the stored reference so that a correct comparison can be made.
Loop Count. Sends the test sequence the number of times set in Loop
Count before it stops. For NTSC and PAL video, set the count for
enough times to send all the possible color phases for the selected
format or use Continuous Looping to make sure the correct color phase
of the test sequence is captured.
Encoder Configuration
Menu
OK
Click OK to accept any changes you have made and exit the menu.
Encoder
Click the Encoder button to display the Encoder Configuration Menu. Use
the controls in the Encoder Configuration menu to set up the filtering type
and genlock source. This soft key is grayed out in the standard instrument.
Use the Encoder Configuration menu to select the filter type and genlock source
for generating an analog video signal. As the generator DSP outputs the 601
serial digital component test sequence, the encoder module converts the test
video sequence to NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL. The test video sequence is
available as composite video or S-Video by connecting to the appropriate output
connector for your testing application.
Figure 2- 11: Encoder Configuration menu
2- 24
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Filter Selection
Select the type of filter to use for chrominance channel processing. Filter
selection has no effect on the luminance channel measurements and
typically very little effect on the chrominance channel measurements.
Gaussian. Select this filter for the least ringing of the transitions
between color bar levels. This is the typical choice for operation.
Brickwall. Select this filter for more transparent operation of the
filtering applied to the chrominance channel. This filter produces more
overshoot (less high frequency filtering) on the color bar transitions
between levels.
Lockup
Select the source of genlock for the generator DSP with the encoder.
Serial Video. Select this source to develop the synchronizing signal
from the serial video applied to the encoder board from the generator
DSP. The generator DSP can be either free running or referenced to an
incoming serial video signal applied to the generator Main In connector.
Black Burst. Select this source to develop the synchronizing signal
from the house analog black burst reference standard. The encoder
derives a serial black burst sync signal that is applied to the generator
Ref In connector to obtain genlock when an external analog reference
signal is used.
OK
Click OK to accept any changes you have made and return to the Generator
Configuration menu.
NOTE. If you want to use the analog black burst to the encoder as the genlock
source, you must not connect a serial digital signal to the generator Main In
connector. That source has priority to provide the synchronizing signal, and if a
serial digital signal is detected on the generator Main In input, that signal will
be used to by the generator.
Capture Configuration
Menu
Use the Capture Configuration menu to select the signal type and sequence you
want to capture. Click the right mouse button on the Capture soft key to access
the Capture Configuration screen shown in Figure 2--12. The following table
describes the selections you can make in the Capture Configuration menu. Refer
to Capture Configuration on page 3--7 for more information.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 25
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 12: Capture Configuration menu
2- 26
Selection
Task to perform
Signal Type
Specify the input video type (601-525, 601-625, NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or
PAL). Click the arrow indicator next to the Signal Type name field to display
the choices and select the test sequence signal type to capture. This
selection is used by the software to select the input connector (either Main
In for direct 601 video or Ref In for 601 video from the decoder) as the
source of the input signal. It also determines the type of Live analog video
that will be available to play back in the Playback Configuration menu
because it controls the decoder operation.
Reference
Sequence
Assign a specific video reference sequence to compare to the incoming
video test sequence capture. Bring up the choices and choose the
appropriate entry. If you choose a reference that is not valid for the incoming
video, a capture will never be made. The default is any valid sequence.
When a test sequence is captured and stored, a date and time is added to
the end of the sequence name to differentiate one captured video sequence
from another of the same name. Refer to Save on page 2-- 29.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Capture As
Select to capture a video sequence as a new reference or as a test.
Capture As a Test. When you capture as a test, you can elect to let
the system use the default file name for the captured test sequence, or
you can give the captured file an alias name to permit easier
identification of a set of captures. The name you give it is stored in a
map file that points it back to the correct reference for testing. If you
forget which reference an alias file name is associated with, you can
bring the sequence up for playback and select the reference video to
find out.
Note: If you want to accept the default name, the name edit field must
be completely empty. If there are any characters, including one or more
spaces in the name edit field, they will be used as the alias file name.
Capture As a Reference. You will do most captures as a test, but you
can select to capture as a reference and use it to capture a test
sequence that has been processed by external components such as
your own composite encoder and decoder. You can also create
references to eliminate the possible effects of the Option 01 Composite
Encoder and Composite Decoder in the same way. When capturing as
a reference, the auto measure feature is not available, and the
captured reference is stored in the PQA300/reference directory. You
must give the new reference a file name by entering an identifying
name in the name field next to the Reference choice. The name you
give it is an alias. The file header id provides the name for the test
sequence that is recognized when you capture it.
You must select the new reference in the sequence selection field to
use it to make a capture and measurement.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 27
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Capture As a User Sequence. This selection lets you capture a
5-second live video sequence. You can apply the calibration striping to
the video as it is captured. A 5-second generate sequence is captured
with either Header Only striping or Header Plus striping as selected in
the menu. The 2-second reference sequence is extracted from the
generate sequence. Give the sequence a meaningful name. That name
is applied to both the generate file and the associated reference
sequence file. Select No Header to capture an unstriped video
sequence you can distribute to other PQA300 systems. You can add
calibration stripes to a video sequence captured without striping by
generating the sequence and recapturing it with striping selected.
Note: A user sequence captured with striping has a unique sequence
ID added to the gray code as it is striped. That ID provides the means
to recognize the sequence. The reference sequence taken from the
generate sequence is associated with the ID, and that information is
stored in the userseq.map file. To use the same user striped generate
sequence in another PQA300, load it to the PQA300/generate directory
and use the Recompute Database feature found in the Other soft key
menu selections. You can also edit the userseq.map file to add the
association information if you get that information from the originating
PQA300 files.
When Capture As a User Sequence is selected and the Capture
Configuration menu is cleared, the Capture soft key label changes to
Start when clicked. The indicator in the soft key also changes to red.
Click the Start soft key to start the capture two seconds before the
point of interest in the live video input signal. After the capture is
completed, the new user sequence is saved automatically if Auto Save
is selected.
Auto Measure
Click the mouse cursor in the selection check box to toggle Auto Measure
on and off. With Auto Measure selected measurements are automatically
made right after a capture. The current measure configuration settings are
used. With Auto Measure off, the video test sequences are captured, but no
measurement is made. You can make measurements on captured test
sequences later. Auto Measure is not active for Capture as a Reference or
Capture as a User Sequence.
Time Out
Specify how long the PQA300 system should wait for a test sequence to
arrive before timing out. You can also disable the time-out feature. Click the
mouse cursor in the selection check box to toggle Time Out on and off. If the
time-out period is exceeded without a capture, the “Capture Time Out”
message appears, and the capture is aborted. The PQA300 system then
returns to the “null” mode (nothing happening) awaiting your next input.
Times must be entered in two digit + two digit format. For example:
30 seconds is entered as 00:30
1 minute is entered as 1:00
The minimum time out setting is 6 seconds. You will get an error message if
you try to set it to less than 6 seconds.
2- 28
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Save
Either enable the Auto Save feature (the normal default) or turn it off if you
want to select what you want saved.
Auto Save. If Auto Save is on, the captured test sequence will be
automatically stored on the hard disk drive using the default file name.
The captured data is saved in 601 format.
Save. The Save soft key permits you to save an existing captured
sequence residing in memory as a file on the hard disk drive when Auto
Save is not enabled. The manual Save soft key is not available with
Auto Save enabled. If you try to capture another test sequence, and the
existing captured sequence is not saved because auto save was not
enabled, you will be warned and given a opportunity to save it.
In either case, the default file name is created automatically. Refer to
Default File Name and Alias File Name following this table.
OK
Click the OK button to accept any changes you have made and to exit the
menu.
Decoder
Click the Decoder button to display the Decoder Configuration menu. Use
the Decoder Configuration menu to select the input source (Composite or
S-Video) and the type of processing used for converting the analog input
video to 601 serial digital video. Refer to Decoder Configuration Menu on
page 2-- 30. This soft key is not available unless Option 01 is installed.
Default File Name. For either an automatic save or a manual save of a captured
sequence, the default file name is created automatically. The Test Sequence name
and time stamp of the capture is used as follows:
nameyyyymmddhhmmss
where name is the sequence name from the header, yyyy is the year, mm is the
month, dd is the day of the month, hh is the hour (in a 24 hour clock), mm is the
minute of the hour, and ss is the second of the minute.
An example of sequence default file name when captured follows:
Mobile+.601-5251998-01133310.cap
This is interpreted in the labels that define this sequence as follows:
Mobile+ 601-525 Jan 01, 1998 @ 13:33:10PM
Alias File Name. The system creates an alias file name for either a test or a
reference in the same manner as the default file name, except it uses the name
you entered in the name edit field instead of the name obtained from the header
ID. Alias file names are mapped to the actual reference name and stored in .map
files in the PQA300/bin directory. Alias test names are saved in the capseqs.map
file, and alias reference names are stored in the userseqs.map file.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 29
Operating Basics
NOTE. If you are capturing a set of the same test sequence to compare, such as
for making adjustments in the device under test, either use the time stamp of the
default file name or a new alias name to distinguish one capture (and its
measurement results) from another.
If you capture a sequence and give it an alias name, that alias name becomes
associated with the actual name of the sequence. You cannot use that alias name
to capture the same sequence or another sequence using the Any valid sequence
selection for the capture choice. You must either select the actual sequence name
to capture (for example Ferris, if the alias file name is associated with a captured
Ferris sequence) or give the new capture a new alias name. This prevents
capturing different sequences under the same alias file name.
When you capture a reference for composite video, it is good practice to include
the type of processing used as part of the file name. For example “Reference 1
NTSC Notch.” Use a descriptive name for the reference. It is important to use
the same processing as the reference when capturing a composite video test. If
you use Notch for the reference and Adaptive Line for the test capture, the results
can shown larger PQR numbers because the encoder and decoder artifacts in each
of the sequences are different.
Decoder Configuration
Menu
Use the Decoder Configuration menu to set the input type to either composite or
S-Video. After you make that choice, a list of processing selections appropriate
for the type of video is displayed as seen in Figure 2--13.
Figure 2- 13: Decoder Configuration menu with composite and S-Video processing selections
2- 30
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Click the type of processing you want to use for capturing a composite or
S-Video test sequence. The processing selection changes the way the decoder
separates the luminance and chrominance portions of the input signal.
The processing type affects the measurement. You must take care to use the same
processing when you compare different equipment. When you save a reference
and measure relative to the saved reference, the processing must be the same for
both the reference and the video sequence being tested. Different processing may
be better for different systems and sequences, but typically you should use
Adaptive Line processing for composite inputs and simple processing for
S-Video inputs.
Selection
Task to perform
Input Selection
Select the type of analog video signal to capture.
Composite. Selects the Composite In connector of the decoder
module as the source of input signal to capture.
S-Video (Y/C). Selects the S-Video connector of the decoder module
as the source of input signal to capture.
Processing
Selection
Select the type of processing you want to apply when decoding the
incoming analog signal for conversion to 601 serial digital format. The Input
Selection choice determines the processing selections available.
Composite Processing Selections
Adaptive Line. This is typically the preferred selection for composite
video testing. It adapts between Comb and Notch processing to
minimize the decoder artifacts.
Notch. This selection provides a simple notch filter to extract the
luminance portion of the composite video and a bandpass filter to
generate the chrominance. Notch can be used to emulate other notch
decoders that may be part of the system under test. Notch is a good
filter choice when you capture a reference to de-embed the encoder
and decoder effects from the measurement.
Comb. This selection provides a full-time comb to separate the
luminance and chrominance. In NTSC this is a 2-line comb, in PAL it is
a 3-line comb. Comb can be used to emulate other comb decoders that
may be part of the system under test.
Adaptive Field. This selection adapts between notch and a field delay
comb. Adaptive Field is useful for sequences with low motion content
or to emulate similar decoders that may be part of the system under
test.
Adaptive Frame. This selection adapts between a notch and a frame
delay comb. Adaptive Frame is useful for sequences with low motion
content or to emulate similar decoders that may be part of the system
under test.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 31
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
S-Video Processing Selections
Simple. This is typically the preferred selection for S-Video. It should
be used when the input luminance and chrominance are well
separated. Simple processing applies the components directly to the
demodulator function with minimal filtering.
Adaptive Line. This selection applies some adaptive comb filtering to
the chrominance input to reduce residual luminance that may be
present. Adaptive Line is needed only if the S-Video input comes from
a source with poor Y/C separation.
OK
Measure Configuration
Menu
Click the OK button to accept changes and return to the Capture
Configuration menu.
In the Measure Configuration menu, you can define the type and parameters of
the measurements to be made, the limits to be used (if any), and whether the
measurement is to be performed on a stored sequence or the current captured
sequence. Click the right mouse button on the Measure soft key to display the
Measure Configuration screen shown in Figure 2--14. Refer to Configure
Measurements on page 3--12 for more information.
Figure 2- 14: Measure Configuration menu
2- 32
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Sequence
Specify the test sequence on which measurements are to be made. The
default is the most recently captured test sequence. Click the arrow indicator
next to the edit field to display the drop-down menu of available test
sequences. If you choose to perform measurements on a stored test
sequence other than the existing captured sequence, and the captured
sequence is not saved, you will be given a chance to save it.
Note: If you have captured the same video sequence multiple times, use the
date and time of the file name to distinguish one captured video sequence
from another. You may want to correlate the test and test times by noting
the time of each capture as you make it.
Save Results
Select None to not save results, select Values to save values, or select
Values & Maps to save values and maps result files.
None. This selection does not save maps or results. The picture
difference map appears as the measurements are being made, but it is
not available to view after the measurement is finished. Values are
available for review after the measurement is finished, but they cannot
be saved for later recall.
Values. If you choose not to save Maps, the results files are saved for
later review, but the picture difference map video is not saved. If you
are interested in only the measurement numbers, saving only the
Values conserves disk drive space. The map is not available after the
measurement is finished.
Values & Maps. Select this choice to view and save both the values
and the picture difference maps. The saved results files can be recalled
from the hard drive for viewing and analysis.
Picture Quality
Measurement
Select any or all of the PQR and the PSNR measurements to be made on
the selected test sequence.
PQR Y. Measures picture quality using the JNDmetix algorithm on the
luminance component of the video signal. In the results displays, the
luminance values obtained are labeled Luma: (Y).
PQR YC. Measures picture quality using the JNDmetix algorithm on
the luminance and chrominance components of the video signal. In the
results displays, the luminance values obtained are labeled Luma:
(YC).
PSNR. Measures peak signal to noise ratio picture differences on the
luminance component of the video signal.
Note: The measurement algorithms for PQR Y and PQR YC are different.
Therefore, the Luma: (Y) values obtained can be slightly different than
Luma: (YC) values.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 33
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Signal Quality
Turn Apply Signal Conditioning on or off by clicking in the check box.
Apply Signal Conditioning (On). Signal conditioning is done either by
using the detected values for gain, level, cropping, and shift or by using
values you set to compensate for the difference with respect to the
reference sequence. The detected correction values are displayed
under the Detected Correction heading in the Signal Quality
parameters dialog screen.
Apply Signal Conditioning (Off). Signal conditioning is not done.
Sub-Region
Turn Apply Sub-Region on or off by clicking in the check box.
Apply Sub-Region (On). Selected fields (temporal) or areas of fields
(spatial) are measured. Unselected fields or areas are omitted from the
measurements made.
Apply Sub-Region (Off). Region selection is not done and the total
field area of all the fields in the captured sequences are included in the
measurement.
Note: If cropping limits are set in the Signal Quality parameters, those
cropping limits are observed when applicable.
OK
Measurement Parameters
Click the OK button to accept changes and exit the menu.
The PQR, PSNR, and Signal Quality measurements have additional parameters
you can set as described in the following discussion.
PQR Parameters. Access the PQR parameters menu by clicking on the Parameters button next to PQR selection in the Picture Quality Measurements box. This
displays the dialog screen shown in Figure 2--15. Click in the check box of a
selection to toggle the selection on or off.
Figure 2- 15: PQR parameters menu
2- 34
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Limits
Turn limits on or off and specify the limit values if you select to use limits.
Make changes to the limits values by clicking the mouse cursor in the edit
field and changing the entry using the keyboard. The limit values are
displayed in the results graphs. In tables, values exceeding the set limits are
indicated in red to alert you to the violation.
Advanced
The advanced settings for the PQR measurement are based on a standard
display model. Do not change their default values for normal operation of
the PQA300 system. The Display Model Parameters menu is shown in
Figure 3-- 4. Refer to Display Model Parameters on page 3-- 32 for further
information.
Note: The default Display Model Parameters are changed for normal
operation. When you have changed between 601-525 and 601-625
measurements, click the Default soft key to set the phosphor properties to
the correct defaults for the signal format.
OK
Click the OK button to accept changes and exit the menu.
PSNR Parameters. Click the Parameters button next to the PSNR selection in the
Picture Quality Measurement box of the Measure Configuration menu to access
the dialog screen shown in Figure 2--16.
Figure 2- 16: PSNR parameters menu
Selection
Task to perform
Limits
Turn limits on or off and specify the limit values if you use limits.
Make changes to the limits values by clicking the mouse cursor in the edit
field and changing the entry using the keyboard. The limit values are
displayed in the results graphs. In tables, values exceeding the set limits are
indicated in red to alert you to the violation.
OK
Click the OK button to accept changes and exit the menu.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 35
Operating Basics
Signal Quality Parameters. Click the Parameters button in the Signal Quality box
to access the dialog screen shown in Figure 2--17.
Figure 2- 17: Signal Quality parameters menu
Selection
Task to perform
Use Detected
Parameters
Turn Use Detected Parameters on or off.
Use Detected Parameters (On). The signal quality parameters detected by
the software from the captured test sequence are used for the measurement
algorithms. The detected corrections for the measurement parameters are
displayed in the Detected Correction column of the table. Click in the
selection box to turn Use Detected Parameters on or off.
Use Detected Parameters (Off). The signal quality parameters set in the
table in the Manual Correction column (either by you or the defaults) are
used for the measurement algorithms. You can specify correction values
other than the defaults by entering them in the appropriate editable fields in
the Signal Quality parameters dialog screen.
Use Limits
2- 36
Turn Use Limits on or off. When selected, the limit values in the table are
used for each of the measurements.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Default
Click the Default soft key to set all the default values to the limits and
manual corrections. The manual correction values assume the same values
as the detected values for the captured sequence when Default is clicked.
OK
Click the OK button to accept changes and exit to the Measure Configuration menu. Click the OK button in the Measure Configuration menu to
accept changes and clear the menu from the display.
Limits Setting. If you use limits for the measurements, you must set the upper and
lower value to reasonable values to obtain the proper out-of-limits conditions for
the measurement. This means the lower limit must be set to some value below
the upper limit and that both settings should be within the range of normal
measurement values. A little experimentation may be needed to determine the
exact limits you want to establish for a test or for certain test conditions. If you
set the limits inappropriately, you may see all the measured values indicated as
out-of-limits in the details display.
H
To adjust the limits to values other than the defaults, click in the box to be
adjusted and edit the value using the keyboard.
H
Use the scroll bar at the right of the display to view the entire list of
measurements and their limit settings.
H
Return to the default values (for both limits and adjust corrections) by
clicking on the Default soft key.
H
Cancel any changes you have made by clicking the Cancel soft key.
H
Click the OK soft key to accept any changes you have made to the settings.
Measurement Correction Value Range. The values shown in the Manual Correction column are used when Use Detected Parameters is not enabled. The Manual
Correction parameters have a limited range of settings that will be accepted. If
you enter a value that is out of the acceptable range, an error message appears,
and the out of range values are indicated in red. The acceptable ranges are as
follows:
Table 2- 3: Manual Correction value ranges and parameter units
Parameter
Manual range settings
Parameter units
Y-XShift
- 10 to +10
Pixels
Cb-XShift
- 10 to +10
Pixels
Cr-XShift
- 10 to +10
Pixels
Y-YShift
- 10 to +10
Pixels
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 37
Operating Basics
Table 2- 3: Manual Correction value ranges and parameter units (cont.)
Parameter
Manual range settings
Parameter units
Cb-YShift
- 10 to +10
Pixels
Cr-YShift
- 10 to +10
Pixels
Left Crop
0 to 700
Lines (Pixels)
Top Crop
0 to 450
Lines (Pixels)
Right Crop
0 to 700
Lines (Pixels)
Bottom Crop
0 to 450
Lines (Pixels)
Y-Level
- 20 to +20
Gray Levels
Cb-Level
- 20 to +20
Gray Levels
Cr-Level
- 20 to +20
Gray Levels
Y-Gain
0.70 to 1.10
None
Cb-Gain
0.70 to 1.10
None
Cr-Gain
0.70 to 1.10
None
Editing changes are made exactly as described for the previous Limits Setting
discussion.
One use of the manual corrections is to vary one parameter value and remeasure
the sequence to observe the PQR or PSNR value for differences. This would be
done after making the capture of the sequence to detect the correction values that
should be used. The detected correction values are based on the observed
difference between the reference sequence values and the captured sequence
values. When you click the Default soft key, the parameter values in the Manual
Correction column assume the same values as in the Detected Correction
column. You can then change one or more of the values in the Manual Correction
column for parameters you are interested in and leave the others set as detected
during the capture of the sequence.
Cropping Settings. Another example using your own measurement correction
values is setting the cropping values. If there is an area of the video sequence
you want to measure that is smaller than the full display, you can set the
cropping values to bound the area to measure.
NOTE. Changes you make to the parameters remain in effect until you either
change the configuration again or restore the defaults. Any parameters you set
for a special measurement should be restored to their defaults to avoid making
an erroneous measurement on a later test.
2- 38
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
The resolution of the active display area is 720 × 486 for 601-525 and 720 × 576
for 601-625. The practical limits of the measurement require that you do not crop
so much that there is not enough information remaining to complete the analysis.
An error message is displayed if you set the cropping limits so that either the left
and right crop or the top and bottom crop overlap.
Apply Sub Region
Use the Sub-Region Parameters menu shown in Figure 2--18 to set the range of
fields in the sequence and the area of the fields to include in the measurements.
Figure 2- 18: Apply Sub-Region parameters menu
Field Range. The default is All Fields. Click Range selection to activate the From
and To choices and edit the boxes to set the range of fields you want to use in the
measurements you have selected. The measurements are made only on the range
of fields selected when the Apply Sub Region selection box is checked.
Edge Cropping. The area of the sub region to measure is defined by setting the
cropping limits. The limits can be set in the edit box for each limit individually.
This choice overrides the edge cropping values set in the Signal Quality
configuration menu, but does not change the cropping settings in that menu. The
second choice for setting the cropping limits is to define the area to include
interactively.
NOTE. If cropping limits are set in the Signal Quality parameters menu they are
not changed when the edge cropping values are changed in the Sub-Region
menu.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 39
Operating Basics
Define the Sub-Region. Click the Define soft key to show the Define Region
video display seen in Figure 2--19. To define a region in the display, place the
cursor at the starting point for drawing the cropping limits box. Drag the mouse
with the mouse button held down to define the size of the cropping box. When
you have defined the size and position of the sub-region box, click the Set
Region soft key (the new label on the Measure soft key). The pixel and line
cropping mark values defined by the box in the display are automatically set in
the Edge Cropping edit fields shown previously in Figure 2--18.
Figure 2- 19: Define Sub-Region view
The defined sub-region stays in effect when the video display is switched
between the impaired video and the results maps. Only one defined sub-region
box is permitted in the display. Once the box is created, you can reposition it by
clicking in the box and holding the mouse button down while dragging the box
to a new area of interest. You must redefine the sub-region box if you want a
different size.
When a measurement is made with Apply Sub-Region selected, only the region
and fields defined by the Sub-Region Configuration menu are used. The picture
difference map you see during the measure sequence shows only the defined
region in the map.
2- 40
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
When the measurement is finished, you can redefine a new sub-region window
and make the measurements again for the new defined region. This same feature
can be used on any captured video sequence by selecting a previously captured
sequence. The defined sub-region then applies to the new measurements made on
the sequence.
Playback Configuration
Menu
Access the Playback Configuration Menu by clicking the right mouse button on
the Playback soft key. This displays the dialog screen shown in Figure 2--20. You
can play back the captured sequence, a filed sequence, the generator sequence, or
the incoming live video from a selected source. You can also select the way a
captured or filed signal is played back: either continuous looping or for a set
number of loops. The direction of the playback is also selectable: forward,
reverse, or front to back and back to front (Palindrome).
The sequence you select for generation is played back. The generator need not be
running.
Figure 2- 20: Playback Configuration menu
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 41
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Sequence
Specify the source of the sequence to play back.
Live. Displays live video from the selected source (601-525, 601-625,
NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL). The decoder setup to determine the
analog video format selection available is made in the Capture
Configuration menu.
Captured. The captured sequence in memory is played back.
Sequence. The file selected from the list of stored sequences is played
back.
Generator. The video test sequence selected for generation is
displayed. The generator does not have to be running.
Behavior
Select the manner that the playback occurs. Note that looping and direction
selections are not applicable to Live mode displays. You can choose to play
the captured video sequence or a file sequence in one of the following
modes:
Continuous. Loops until playback is stopped.
Loop Count. Defaults to 1 and cannot be set to 0.
Forward. Plays the sequence from beginning to end.
Reverse. Plays the sequence from end to beginning.
Palindrome. Plays the sequence from beginning to end and back
again to the beginning.
OK
Play Back a Video
Sequence
Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Playback Configuration menu.
Click the left mouse button on the Playback soft key to play back the video
sequence selected in the Playback Configuration menu. Click the INT button in
the Video Controls window (see Figure 2--21), if needed, to associate the video
controls with the SVGA monitor display.
When you are playing back a captured video sequence or a file video sequence,
you can pause the playback, advance it field by field in either direction, or go to
the first field or last field in a video sequence. There is a field number box in the
Video Controls window to indicate the field being displayed.
You can edit the field number to select a field for display. Click in the field
number box (this pauses the playback) and edit the number using the keyboard.
The field selection switches when a valid number is entered (only valid numbers
are recognized). For example, if the display is paused at field 34 and you erase
the 4, the display switches to field 3. If you then type a 6 after the 3 to make it
36, the display immediately switches from field 3 to field 36.
2- 42
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
The field range of a reference video sequence is 120 fields, but you can select a
range of fields to include in a measurement (refer to Apply Sub Region on
page 2--39). When viewing a results video map or impaired video capture, the
range of available fields is shown next to the field number box.
Select PQR or PSNR
Luma & Chroma Map
Pause
Run
Monitor
association
Run
Luma Map
Test Image
Reference Image
Field No.
Go to End
Advance Field
Step Back Field
Go to Beginning
Figure 2- 21: Video Controls for playback
When you are playing back a captured video sequence or a file video sequence,
you can also view the reference sequence, the test sequence, the luma difference
map (Y), or the luma & chroma difference map (YC). Make this selection in the
Video Controls window by clicking on the R (reference), T (test), Y (luma PQR
or PSNR map), or YC (luma and chroma PQR map) box at the left side of the
controls. A selection that is not available is grayed out.
Click the mouse button and hold down on either of the field advance buttons
(forward or reverse) to step through the fields in succession at two-fifths of a
second intervals in the direction of selected button.
When viewing any of the picture difference maps, you can also select a region of
interest and obtain a picture quality measurement of the defined area. Refer to
Select a Region of Interest on page 2--54 for a description of how to define the
region.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 43
Operating Basics
Results Configuration
Menu
Use the Results feature to display saved results files. Access the Results
Configuration menu by clicking the right mouse button on the Result soft key.
This displays the dialog screen shown in Figure 2--22. A description of each of
the results displays with examples begins on page 2--46.
Figure 2- 22: Results Configuration menu
2- 44
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Sequences
Choose one or more of the existing results files. These are the saved test
sequence measurement result files stored on the hard disk drive.
If you select (check) a single file, all the existing measurement results
(summary, graph, detail, or video map) for that file are available to
select for display. The selected file name must also be highlighted. Do
not select one file and highlight another that is not checked.
If you select (check) multiple files, all the graphical results are
displayed in a single graphical view (up to 20 traces) so you can
compare them. Highlight each of the files as you select it and chose
which of the test results you want to display. You must have at least
one of the results types (PQR Luma, PQR Luma & Chroma, or PSNR
Luma) selected for each sequence you have checked or the sequence
becomes unchecked.
Select any of the results files you want to display.
Note: The only available video results are the results for the sequence that
you highlighted in the Results Configuration menu (see Figure 2--22). The
highlighted sequence must also be checked.
Clear
Selections
Choose this to quickly clear all the present file selections before you begin
another set of selections.
Picture Quality
Measurement(s)
Specify the measurement result(s) you want to compare. The available
results for the highlighted sequence are displayed.
Selected results are highlighted in the list. The first time a sequence is
selected, all the available results are also selected. Click the result in
the list to select or unselect it.
If you unselect all the results in the list, the sequence selection also
become unchecked in the Sequence list.
If you uncheck the selection name in the Sequence list, all the results
selections for that choice become unselected.
OK
Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Results Configuration menu.
After selecting the results you want to see in the Results Configuration menu and
exiting the menu, click the left mouse button on the Results soft key. The results
files you selected are loaded from the hard disk drive for display. After all the
results files are retrieved, the first results display is the results graph.
Selecting a Results Type
1. Click the right mouse button on the results type selection soft key to display
the selection choices in a popup menu as shown in Figure 2--23. If a choice
is not available for the present application, it is grayed out.
2. Select the results display you want with the mouse cursor. The soft key label
changes to show the active display type: Summary, Graph, Details, or Video.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 45
Operating Basics
3. Scroll through the results displays by clicking the left mouse button on the
results type selection soft key. When the mouse arrow is on the selection soft
key, a small help label with the message “Next View” is displayed.
Figure 2- 23: Selection soft key for results type
Results Displays
The following text describes the four types of results displays for the PQR and
PSNR measurements: Summary, Details, Graph, and Video.
Summary Display. The system displays a summary page when the selected
measurements have finished. This page displays the overall results for a given
test (see Figure 2--24). Limit values and the range of fields included in the results
are displayed across the top of the columns. Any values outside the defined
limits are displayed in red for quick analysis. The summary display is text only
and allows no value changes. If the information is too long to fit on one screen, a
vertical scroll bar is enabled. You can use the selection soft key (Summary,
Detail, Graph, or Video) in the front panel to switch the results type being
displayed. If you view the Transcript window (one of the choices found in the
Other soft key menu), the selection soft key is labeled “Transcript.”
Either or both of the overall picture quality measurements (PQR and PSNR)
appear as configured for the measurement. The Signal Quality data in the
Summary table are obtained from the stripe in the header section of the test
sequence. This information is measured regardless of the selection of test
sequence (Header Only or Header Plus) to be captured. In normal systems there
will be little or no variation from the nominal values for the luma and chroma
shift or level. Cropping values depend on external factors of the system under
test. Excessive cropping can make the test sequence unusable for measurement.
Missing or Duplicate Fields. If fields were either missing or duplicated during the
capture of the video sequence, the results obtained from the measurement will
show sudden shifts in the picture quality values. When a field is missing from
the captured data, measurements up to the missing field show normal values.
2- 46
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
After the missing field, the captured video and the reference video used for the
comparison measurements will not be in field step.
If a field is duplicated in the captured video, the measurement results show a
mismatch of data for the duplicated field and then return to normal values. The
missing or duplicated fields are detectable by the field counter when a Header
Plus sequence is being measured. The field count number is present in each field
of the Header Plus video sequence. When missing fields are detected, a warning
is displayed at the top of the summary and details results.
Figure 2- 24: Measurement summary page
Details. There can be two selections for measurement details available in this
results type display. When both choices are available, click the left mouse button
on the selection name field to select the data table to view.
The detail table view of the measurement data (see Figure 2--25) shows you the
PQR and/or PSNR result information on a field-by-field basis. You can scroll
through the list to any field using either the vertical scroll bars on the list or the
arrow keys on the keyboard. Select a field within the display by clicking the left
mouse button on it. This selection is held when switching between the results
displays. Values that are outside the defined limit values are highlighted in red.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 47
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 25: Details display screen
The second viewing option in the Details display is the field-by-field Signal
Quality data, in tabular form, as shown in Figure 2--26. These data are available
only when a Header Plus test sequence is captured. The table displays a
field-by-field listing of the detected parameter values for Level, Gain, Horizontal
Shift, and Vertical Shift of the Luma and Chroma values. In a stable system,
there will be very little or no variation of the parameter values across the fields
from 1 to 120. If larger variations occur, it is an indication that there are time
varying changes occurring in the system under test.
2- 48
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 26: Signal quality measurement data screen
Graph. Select this results type view for a graphic representation of the field-byfield performance. An example of the display with multiple results traces enabled
is shown in Figure 2--27. Each curve has an identifying label in the legend
window. The horizontal axis shows field numbers, and the vertical axis displays
measurement values for the active trace.
A vertical cursor is displayed by clicking the mouse cursor on a spot in the
graph. The field number and the PQR or PSNR measurement value (as
appropriate for the active trace) at the cursor’s location are displayed. Measurement values that exceed the set limits are shown in red.
You can control the position of the cursor in the display by pointing the mouse
cursor to a new position and clicking the left mouse button or holding the mouse
button down on the cursor and moving the mouse to a new position. The
keyboard arrow keys can also be used to position the cursor. The up arrow and
left arrow keys move the cursor to the left. The down arrow and right arrow keys
move the cursor to the right.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 49
Operating Basics
Reference - Cheer+ 601-- 525 Jan 07, 1998 @ 08:33:48AM - PQA300
Figure 2- 27: Graphical display screen
Click the expand button in the graph legend window (shown in Figure 2--28) to
expand the display horizontally for better resolution of the displayed data points.
Each click of the button expands the trace by a single increment up to a
magnification factor of 10 times. Click the contract button to decrease the
magnification by a single increment for each click or click the X1 button to
restore the unmagnified trace. When you expand the trace, a scroll bar is
displayed at the bottom of the traces. Use the scroll bar to display any point in
the expanded display.
Turn the graph legend window on or off by clicking the left mouse button on the
Legend soft key in the graph display. Turn the legend window on to make the
trace selections, and either turn it off or drag it out of the graph for a unblocked
view the traces. There is also a selection under the Other soft key to control
viewing the legend window.
2- 50
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Restore to X1
Expand Contract
Limits Toggle
Trace Color Selection
Enable trace display
Select active trace
Figure 2- 28: Legend window for graph displays
Position the graph legend window in the display by placing the mouse cursor in
the box, and then clicking and holding the left mouse button down while you
reposition the box by moving the mouse. If the file names are longer than can be
fully displayed in the legend window, expand the box horizontally from either
end of the box. Position the mouse cursor on either end to get the expansion
indicator, and then hold down the left mouse button while stretching or shrinking
the legend window width.
The selected graph line is displayed as a solid line; the other graph lines are
displayed as dashed lines. The current trace (the one that is named in the label at
the top of the results window) is shown in a different color than the other traces.
The measurement limits are displayed as dotted red horizontal lines. The Limits
button in the graph legend window turns the limits traces on or off for the active
trace if limits were used in obtaining the results for display. You can select trace
color individually for each trace.
Click the Trace Color Selection wheel next to the trace color line to display the
color palette shown in Figure 2--29. Select the new trace color from the color
pallet basic colors or define a custom color. Apply the color to the trace. The
trace color you select stays in effect for the results traces until you change it.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 51
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 29: Trace color selection palette
Figure 2- 30: Custom color palette
2- 52
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Click the results trace name in the graph legend window to select the active
trace. The active trace is the one that determines the scale, scale labels, and
limits. It is shown in a solid trace line. Traces that are enabled, but not selected,
are shown as dotted trace lines. Enable or disable the trace from the display by
clicking on the small square at the beginning of the trace name. A check in the
box means the trace is displayed. You can turn off all the traces, including the
active trace. The usual display is either the active trace alone or multiple traces
of the same test sequence for comparing. Displaying multiple traces of unrelated
results produces a confusing display.
Video. Use this results type to show reference video, captured test video
sequences, and picture difference maps (see Figure 2--31 and Figure 2--32). Use
the field indicator window to go to a selected field in the sequence. Use the
selections in the Video Controls window (shown in Figure 2--21 on page 2--43)
to select the type of video sequence, play, pause, and scroll through the video
fields. When the sequence is paused, you can also use the keyboard arrow keys
for scrolling through the fields. The left and up arrow keys scroll backwards
(lower field number) while the right and down arrow keys scroll forward (higher
field number).
Figure 2- 31: Captured video display with stripe
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 53
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 32: PSNR picture difference map display
Select a Region of Interest. Select a region of interest in the picture difference
map. The picture quality measurement for the selected region (ROI) is provided
in the status bar readout as shown in Figure 2--33.
Figure 2- 33: Select a region of interest
Use the video controls to pause the video playback (see Figure 2--21 on
page 2--43). Select a field of interest by entering the field number in the field
count indicator. You can also use the field step buttons of the video controls to
step through the fields to a field of interest. Place the mouse cursor at a starting
point of a region of interest and hold down the left mouse button. Define the ROI
box by moving the mouse to draw a box. Release the mouse button when the
region is selected.
2- 54
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Function Configuration
Menu
Use the Function Configuration Menu to select a function to run from the
function library, create a function, or edit a function file.
Running a Function. Right click the Function soft key to display the Function
Configuration menu (shown in Figure 2--34). Click the Function menu selection
list, and then use the mouse cursor to select a named function file from the
functions stored in the function library. Once you have determined the function
you want to run, click the OK soft key to make the selection and exit the
Function Configuration menu. To run the selected function, click the Function
soft key.
Figure 2- 34: Function Configuration menu
Learn Mode. The PQA300 system provides a function learn capability for
creating a function file. If you start the learning process (function recording), the
PQA300 system logs every configuration change and control activation you
make until the function recording is stopped. It does not record mouse movements or mouse clicks. It does not record changes until the changes are accepted.
Click Learn Mode to use the function recording process. The first line of the
function script is determined by the initialization you choose to make.
H
The Don’t Initialize To Preference setting omits any initialization for the
learned function.
H
The Overwrite & Start With Current Preference setting adds a command line
that initializes the PQA300 system to the configuration in the preference file
that is selected in the Preference Configuration menu.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 55
Operating Basics
H
The Save & Start With New Preference setting adds a command line that
saves the present PQA300 system configuration into a new preference file
and initializes the system to the new preference file configuration.
Click the Function soft key to start the learning process. The Function soft key is
renamed to Learning, and the soft key indicator changes to red to show that a
Learn process is in operation. Complete the process by making all the control
selections and configuration changes needed to perform the task intended. This
includes generating a sequence, capturing a sequence, and measuring a sequence.
When all the selected processes are finished, click Learning to stop the recording
session. The Save As window shown in Figure 2--35 is then displayed. Give the
new function a meaningful name so that it can be easily identified for later use.
Click the Save button in the Save As window. The recorded steps are stored in
the PQA300 function library. You can save the files in other directories on any
accessible network file system, but the functions must be stored in the PQA300
function directory to be accessed.
Figure 2- 35: The Save As file window
Editing a Function. An alternate method for function creation is to edit the
function commands of an existing file using the function editor to develop a new
function. A function can contain a setup and can call other functions to perform a
set of measurements or other instrument operations automatically.
You can string successive functions together to accomplish a task, such as:
2- 56
H
Generate and capture a designated test sequence.
H
Make the measurements that are configured.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
H
Display the results in any of the results display modes (summary, detail,
graphical, or picture difference video map).
H
Print the results to a file or printer.
When the Edit soft key is selected, the Function Edit window shown in
Figure 2--36 is displayed. The text file for the selected function is displayed for
review or editing. The function script is a set of Tcl programming commands.
The script can be edited to add looping, branching, or other Tcl commands, and
to call other functions to make a function list. Refer to Editing on page 3--29 for
further information on editing of a function file and information on the sample
function files provided in the PQA300/function directory.
Figure 2- 36: Function edit screen
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 57
Operating Basics
Print Configuration Menu
Selection
Task to perform
Script
The script of the function file to edit appears in the Script window. Use the
scroll bars to view the complete function file.
OK
Accepts the current edits and returns to the Function Configuration menu.
Cancel
Click Cancel to revert back to the text that was present prior to making any
changes to the text. The function file reverts to the last saved text.
Save
Displays the Windows Save As screen for saving and naming a file to save.
Help
Displays the available help for the Function Edit screen.
Undo
Reverts to the text that was present immediately before the last edit action.
Cut
Cuts selected text and places it in a copy buffer. Text that you cut is
available to paste until another cut is made. To select text in the script, hold
and drag the mouse to define the desired text area.
Copy
Copies selected text to a copy buffer. The copied text can be pasted in the
file under edit or into a new text file.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the copy buffer at the text cursor location.
Delete
Deletes selected text. Deleted text is not saved to a copy buffer.
Select All
Selects the complete text of the function file.
Find/Replace
Find searches for a designated text string.
Replace replaces text located by a Find with a designated text string.
Check for Errors
Checks an edited function for for syntax errors and displays any errors in the
Check Results window.
Check
The results of the compilation of the function file are displayed in the Check
window. You can click an error result to go to the area of the error in the
function script and correct the error.
Use the Print Configuration Menu to specify how measurement results and
screen dumps are printed. Typically, you will either send hard copy to an external
printer (local on any accessible network printer if the system is connected to a
network) or save the information to a disk file.
Print Configuration. Access the Print configuration menu by clicking the left
mouse button on the Print soft key. This displays the dialog screen shown in
Figure 2--37. The printer selections available to you depend on the printers
accessible on your system. You can print the displayed information (details,
graphs, or video fields) as bit-maps or Postscript by selecting an appropriate
printer.
2- 58
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 37: Typical Print configuration menu
Start printing by selecting OK. Exit the screen without printing by clicking on
the Cancel soft key.
Select Properties to specify the format of the file (these are: orientation, black
and white or color, and others). A typical property dialog screen is shown in
Figure 2--38. The exact look of the properties dialog screen depends on the
printer capabilities and driver.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 59
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 38: A typical printer properties configuration menu
Page Setup. Use Page Setup to format a header and footer to be printed on the
report pages. Access the Page Setup menu by clicking the right mouse button on
the Print soft key. The dialog screen shown in Figure 2--39 appears. The default
header is the name of the test sequence with a time and date. You can change the
header name. You can also set up the page to print the current system date and
time using the formatting codes shown in Table 2--4.
NOTE. Change the title, footer, and comments to match the report contents when
you print a report. The file name, time, and date change automatically.
2- 60
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 39: Page Setup configuration menu
Page Setup Formatting. Standard Windows formatting codes define the information that is printed and its placement in the formatted output. All of the header
and footer information is printed on every page. The title information is
automatically printed centered at the top of the page in larger font. The
comments are printed on the line following the file name in the formatted output.
The Tektronix logo and the application name are also printed in the footer of
each page. The formatting codes used to add and place the remainder of the
information are given in Table 2--4.
Table 2- 4: Formatting codes used in the Page Setup menu
Format code
Formatting action
&c
Center the text that follows
&d
Print the system date
&f
Print the file name
&l
Left justify the text that follows
&p
Print the page number
&r
Right justify the text that follows
&t
Print the system time
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 61
Operating Basics
External 601 Display
Configuration Menu
You can use an external 601 picture monitor to to display full resolution signal
images including video fields and difference maps. To configure the viewing
capability, use the 601 Display menu, which is accessed by clicking the right
mouse button on the 601 Display soft key. The configuration menu is shown in
Figure 2--40.
Figure 2- 40: External 601 Display Configuration menu
The external 601 display selections are shown in the following table:
Selection
Task to perform
Sequences
Select the source of the video you want to display from the following
choices:
Captured. Displays the current captured video sequence.
Sequence. Displays the selected stored file sequence. You must
further select the sequence to display. Click the down arrow in the
sequence name field to display the available choices. Select the one to
display by placing the mouse cursor on the choice and clicking the left
mouse button.
Note: If you are analyzing a sequence of one format, for example
601-625, do not select to play back a signal in 601-525 format. The
clocking circuitry of the analyzer card cannot run at two different clock
frequencies at the same time. However, it is possible to analyze and
generate with different formats at the same time, so you can test the
effects of a format translation device on picture quality.
2- 62
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Selection
Task to perform
Modes
Select either full screen or overlay to display video on the external monitor.
Full Screen. Displays the sequence you specify full screen.
Overlay. Not enabled.
Behavior
Play the selected video sequence in one of the two following modes:
Continuous. Plays the sequence until you stop it.
Loop Count. Plays the sequence the number of times set in the Loop
Count edit field.
Select the direction of play of the sequence.
Forward. Plays the sequence from beginning to end.
Reverse. Plays the sequence from end to beginning.
Palindrome. Plays the sequence front to back and back to front for the
selected number of times (looping or continuous).
Preference
Configuration Menu
Use the Preference Configuration menu to save preference presets and select
presets to restore. Display the menu shown in Figure 2--41 by clicking the right
mouse button on the Preferences soft key.
Figure 2- 41: Preference Configuration menu
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 63
Operating Basics
The factory preset is a read-only file. It is available to restore specific settings to
the PQA300 system for factory and service testing procedures by restoring all the
default configuration settings. Use the factory preset to remove any settings
remaining from previous operation and begin a new setup with known settings.
The factory preset also eliminates the video sequence currently stored in memory
if you use the factory preset for the startup preset selection. If you write over a
user-configured preset by making changes and saving without creating a new
preset name, the preset takes on the new settings you made.
Selection
Task to perform
Preference
Presets
Select one of the saved preference presets as the one that is restored when
the Preference soft key is selected.
Save
Use Save to store a new instrument configuration as a preset. You can
create a new one by entering a name in Preference Preset name edit field.
Spaces are accepted as valid characters for a preset file name. If you enter
only spaces and save the preset, the preference file is created as .prf. It will
appear as a blank line in the preset drop-down list. You can overwrite a
saved preference setup by selecting it and resaving with a new configuration. The name will remain the same in this case.
A new saved preference preset is the default selection that is restored when
you click the Preference soft key.
Startup
Select any of the stored preference setups, including the one created at
shutdown, as the one that is restored at the start up of the PQA300 system
application.
In the Preference Configuration menu, click the down arrow in the Startup
name area to display a drop-down menu of the stored presets. Click the
preset name you want to have restored at application startup. The settings
stored in the startup preset file are restored each time the application is
started. Note that using the factory preset as the startup restores the startup
selection to shutdown.
OK
Click the OK button when you have finished making your selection. This
exits the Preferences Configuration menu.
The number of preference presets that you can save to the PQA300/preference
directory is limited only by storage space available on the hard disk drive.
However, you should limit the number to a manageable number to prevent
confusion about what a particular preset configuration does. Delete unneeded
preference files using the Windows NT file management tools or the File
Operation menu of the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System (refer to File
Operations on page 2--66).
2- 64
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Other Soft Key Choices
Press the Other soft key to access some operation supporting functions. These
are shown in Figure 2--42. Unavailable selections are grayed out.
View Graph Legend. The graph legend is available for display only while graph
results are displayed. Turn the legend on or off using the selection on the Other
soft key or with the Legend soft key in the graph display.
View Video Controls. The Video Controls are available during playback operation
and when viewing video of either test sequences or maps. Turn it off by
deselecting the choice in the Other soft key choices.
View Transcript Window. The transcript window lists the application activities that
have occurred and are occurring for use as a debugging tool. Use the scroll bar to
move through the list of events if necessary.
Figure 2- 42: Other soft key menu choices
Working Directory. The PQA300 system application looks for its files in the
working directory. Use this window to select the working directory by double
clicking on a directory name. Double click the [..] symbol to go up the directory
tree one directory at a time. You can also enter or edit the path directly in the
Path edit field. To save your changes, either select the OK soft key or press the
enter key. The Working Directory window closes.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 65
Operating Basics
NOTE. The working directory must contain all the PQA300 sub-directories. The
application software expects to find the files in specific directories. If you select
a working directory that is not structured as needed for the application, the
supporting files for generate, results, and so on, will not be available. On the
PQA300 system, the appropriate working directory is D:\PQA300.
D:\PQA300
Figure 2- 43: Working directory selection screen
File Operations. Use the File Operations screen to move files between the internal
hard drive and the floppy disk drive and to retrieve files from the CD-ROM
drive. The dialog screen for the File Operation menu is shown in Figure 2--44.
Go down the directory tree by double-clicking on a directory name in the top
window. Select a file by clicking on the name in the bottom window. Go back up
the directory tree by double-clicking on the “..” selection.
You can store generate sequences, reference sequences, captured sequences, and
results files on the hard disk drive. Generator video sequences are about
102 Mbytes each, and reference and test video sequences are from 42 Mbytes to
49 Mbytes each.
You can copy stored files from the hard disk drive to a diskette in the floppy disk
drive or to a selected network file system. Transfer files between the CD, the
floppy disk drive, the internal disk drive, or the network directories by selecting
a file or a set of files in a list and clicking on the transfer direction arrow in the
File Operations menu. Use the scroll bars to view file lists that are too long for
one display window.
2- 66
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Click the arrow to display the Select Network Drive screen
D:\PQA300\capture\
F:\PQA300\capture\
Figure 2- 44: File Operations menu under the Other soft key
Select Network Drive. Access the Select Network Drive dialog screen, shown in
Figure 2--45, by clicking on the selection arrow next to the directory label field
(shown in Figure 2--44). The choices include the hard disk drive, the floppy disk
drive, the CD drive, and any available network drives. Select both the source
directory and target directory for file transfers as appropriate. Files can be
transferred in either direction between currently selected drives.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 67
Operating Basics
Figure 2- 45: Select Network Drive menu
Recompute Database. As you capture user references, alias-named test sequences,
and user sequence files, the information about the names assigned to the files and
the references that are associated with the files is stored in text files in the
PQA300 bin directory. To regain disk space, delete user references, alias-named
test captures, and user-named sequences that are no longer used.
The database files holding the names and associations are not changed to
eliminate the aliases and associations. The extra information in the files does not
cause an operating problem for the PQA300 system, but the database files are
added to every time a new alias-named file and association is created. If you use
an alias name that is already associated with another reference, you can get an
error message, because the name is already associated with a different reference
sequence. This message can occur even if the conflicting file is erased, because
the database files still contain the previous association of the alias name.
Use the Recompute Database selection as part of the disk-space clean up after
deleting a large number of user files or after adding user files from another
PQA300 system. When the database is recomputed, the system updates database
files to delete associations that are no longer in use, and adds new associations of
the user files that are copied to the PQA300 system.
2- 68
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Save Values to Disk. This selection saves the summary and detail results of the
current results displays to a text file on the selected disk drive. The Save As
menu shown in Figure 2--46 is displayed when you select the Save Values to
Disk feature. You can name the file by clicking in the file name field and editing
the default name. You can use the Save in: choice to select a drive where you
want to save the files.
PQA300
Figure 2- 46: The Save As menu for saving results text files
Click the arrow key in the Save in: edit field to display the network selection
menu shown in Figure 2--47. In this menu you can select any drive on the
network you have access to for saving the results text files. The Help ? in this
menu accesses the What’s This help for information on the choices in the menu.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 69
Operating Basics
PQA300
PQA300
Figure 2- 47: The network selection menu for choosing the location to store results
text files
Display Settings. Click the Display Setting selection in the Other menu choices to
show the Display Settings controls (see Figure 2--48). The display settings
controls allow you to individually set the brightness and contrast of the maps and
video displays. The controls adjust the display that is active when the Display
Settings menu is activated. The menu label changes to indicate the active display
type (Video, PQR Maps, or PSNR Maps). Adjust the contrast and brightness as
needed for your viewing conditions.
Figure 2- 48: Display settings controls
In the map displays you can adjust the brightness level to highlight the areas of
most picture difference. As the brightness level decreases, the display threshold
of the video increases so that only the larger differences remain visible.
2- 70
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
Select Maintain Aspect Ratio to have map or video displays keep the same
vertical-to-horizontal ratio when you resize the PQA300 system window. If
Maintain Aspect Ratio is not checked, the map and video displays resize in the
same proportions as the PQA300 system window.
Hardware Settings. The controls for setting the slot locations for the analyzer
DSP and generator DSP modules are in the Hardware Settings menu (shown in
Figure 2--49). Click a slot in the configuration menu to switch between Analyzer,
Generator, and Empty (undesignated). If you switch the location of the Analyzer
and Generator, you must reconnect the rear panel signal cables appropriately.
The default configuration is:
H
Slot 1: Option 01 composite decoder (if installed).
H
Slot 2: The analyzer DSP.
H
Slot 3: The generator DSP.
H
Slot 4: Option 01 composite encoder (if installed).
H
Slot 5: Video circuit card. The video card is not a recognized PQA300
system module and is shown as Unknown in the Hardware Settings menu.
Figure 2- 49: Hardware settings menu
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 71
Operating Basics
Encoder/Decoder Diagnostics. Click the Enc-Dec Diags soft key selection in the
Hardware Settings menu to access the Option 01 user diagnostics. You can select
the diagnostic tests for each module separately. The diagnostics provide pass/fail
testing of the Encoder and Decoder module circuitry. The results of the test are
displayed in the Results box with the name of the test and the pass or fail result
of the test. The Encoder Diagnostics take longer to complete than the Decoder
diagnostics. Use the scroll bar to view the completed test results.
Figure 2- 50: Encoder/Decoder diagnostics and Encoder Auto-Cal
Encoder Auto-Cal. The automatic calibration routine compensates the adjustments
of the encoder module for temperature changes and aging. Use this feature about
every six months to maintain optimum encoder operation. You can also use it if
the Encoder diagnostic tests start showing soft failures (failures that occur with
temperature changes). Allow the PQA300 system to completely warm up (about
20 minutes) before using the automatic calibration feature. This time permits all
of the circuitry to stabilize, and the auto-cal adjustments are optimized at the
normal operating temperature.
Help Menu. The PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System has a Windows-based
help system. To obtain general help on the PQA300 system select Help in the
Other soft key selection list. The Help Topics contents screen shown in
Figure 2--51 is displayed. Use this screen to navigate through the help system as
follows:
H
2- 72
Use the mouse to select a content area and double-click to open the book.
When you see a topic you want to read about, either double click the topic or
select Display in the Help Topics screen.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Operating Basics
H
Select the Index tab to search by topic or select the Find tab to search for
words in the help file. Refer to the Windows NT documentation for more
information on using a Windows-based help system.
H
Click the Help button in a configuration menu to enter the help system at a
screen related to that configuration menu.
Help Topics: PQA300 Picure Quality Analysis System
Figure 2- 51: Help system contents screen
Minimize, Exit, and About. The Minimize choice reduces the PQA300 system
application to an icon, but leaves the application running. Exit terminates the
application and saves the current configuration settings in the shutdown
preferences preset file. If the shutdown preset file is selected either as the startup
preset or as the preset to be restored when the Preference soft key is clicked, the
configuration settings at the last application exit will be restored. The About
choice displays the copyright information for the application.
Messages and Prompts
Messages and prompts inform you of certain actions. See Appendix F for a list of
Option 01 and system error messages and their meanings.
Progress Indicator. In the status bar at the bottom of the display, a progress
indicator, shown in Figure 2--52, shows you the name of the activity that is
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
2- 73
Operating Basics
occurring and its progress. If multiple actions are occurring, for example,
obtaining the results for several test sequences, the progress bar restarts with
each new action. When the final action has finished, the progress bar is removed
and the action line states that the action has completed. The transcript window
also displays the action that is occurring in text format.
Figure 2- 52: Progress indicator shown across the bottom of the display
Capture Mode. Several different Capture Mode dialogs are available to you,
depending on the choices you made in the Capture Configuration menu. Activity
messages are displayed in the status bar. The messages indicate such activity as
waiting for a sequence, capturing, saving, and time out. The progress indicator
shows the state of the named activity when appropriate.
Measure Mode. During a picture quality measurement, the status bar displays the
progress of the measurement. To the right of the progress indicator, you will see
the measured value for the field, the peak measurement that occurs during the
measurement, and a field indicator showing the current field being measured.
The peak value found as all the fields are measured is held when the measurement is finished. The same messages are displayed when a measurement results
file is restored for viewing.
Configuration Errors. If you click the left mouse button on any of the PQA300
system function soft keys that have associated configuration menus, you will get
an error message if the configuration is incorrectly set up to produce the action
you selected. For example, if you click the Results soft key and there are no
results selected, an error message displays.
2- 74
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Reference
This section explains some user tasks in detail and gives step-by-step procedures
to set up the PQA300 system to do the tasks.
You can use the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System to test serial digital
video test sequences (directly) and analog composite video signals (after
conversion to 601 serial digital). Use either the Option 01 encoder and decoder
or your own high-quality decoder and encoder to convert an NTSC or PAL
composite video or S-Video signal to a 601 serial digital signal for input to the
analyzer.
Testing for Picture Quality
Testing the picture quality of a video processing device involves the following
steps:
Serial Digital Video Test
Signal Connections
H
Video Test Signal connections
H
Generator configuration
H
Capture configuration
H
Measure configuration
H
Viewing and interpreting the measurement results
To test the picture quality of a 601 digital video signal, make the connections to
the PQA300 system as shown in Figure 3--1.
It is not necessary to use the loop-through output if it is not needed in the test
system, nor is it necessary to terminate the active loop-through outputs. The
generator free runs on its internal 27 MHz reference if a serial digital video
signal is not connected to the generator DSP Channel A In connector. The
generator will genlock to an applied serial digital video signal on the Channel A
In connector or to a serial black burst from the encoder board applied to the
generator Channel B In connector.
NOTE. The Channel A In signal has priority over the Channel B In signal for
synchronization. However, to avoid a synchronization source conflict when there
is no serial digital signal applied to the Channel A In connector, disconnect the
Channel B In serial black signal when testing 601 serial digital video.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 1
Reference
Ch A in
1
Analyzer Generator
module module Ch A Out
2
3
4
SVGA video
module
601 Out
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
To SVGA
monitor
601 Digital video from
601 Digital Input to
the device under test
the device under test
(response)
(stimulus)
601 Digital video
loop through output
to a 75 Ω system
Figure 3- 1: PQA300 signal connections for serial digital signal testing
Composite Video Test
Signal Connections
To test the picture quality of an analog composite video signal, you must first
convert it to 601 serial digital for input to the analyzer DSP. The signal connections for using your own encoder and decoder are shown in Figure 3--2.
The Option 01 modules are in slots 4 and 5. The Option 01 encoder and decoder
modules require additional rear panel cabling and setup of the encoder and
decoder modules. The additional cable connections required depend on the
source of genlock. The alternate cable cable configurations are shown in
Figure 3--2 for Serial Digital Lockup (genlock) and in Figure 3--3 for Analog
Black Burst Lockup (genlock).
Serial Digital Lockup. The serial digital signal from the generator can be the
source of the lockup signal to the encoder board. You can choose to allow the
generator DSP to free run on its internal reference. You can also synchronize the
generator DSP to a serial video reference by connecting a serial video reference
to the generator DSP Channel A In BNC connector. To avoid a synchronization
conflict, do not connect a serial digital video signal to the generator DSP
Channel A In connector when you use the serial black output signal of the
encoder for genlock.
3- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Decoder
Analyzer Generator
DSP
DSP
Encoder
Ch B
In
Ch B
In
601
Out
601
Out
1
SVGA video
module
601 In
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Composite
from DUT
(response)
Figure 3- 2: PQA300 signal connections for composite signal testing using serial digital lockup
Black Burst Lockup. If you use an analog composite signal to the encoder for
genlock, make the connection between the encoder serial black out connector and
the generator DSP Channel B In connector as shown in Figure 3--3. Connect the
analog composite signal used as a reference to the Genlock input. You can
connect the Genlock loop-through output to a 75 Ω system or you can terminate
it using a 75 Ω BNC termination. If you do not connect a genlock signal to the
encoder module, the serial black output from the encoder becomes invalid, and
you must disconnect it from the generator DSP Channel B In connector.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 3
Reference
Decoder
Analyzer Generator
DSP
DSP
Encoder
Ch B
In
Ch B
In
601
Out
601
Out
1
Video
601 In
2
Composite
from DUT
(response)
3
Serial
Black Out
4
5
Genlock
loop
through
6
Composite
Genlock
7
8
9
10
11
12
Composite
to DUT
(stimulus)
Figure 3- 3: PQA300 signal connections for composite signal testing using analog black burst genlock
NOTE. When a signal is applied to the inputs of the passive loop-through
connectors of the Decoder and Encoder modules, the loop-through connectors
must be properly terminated, either by connecting to a 75 Ω system or by using
75 Ω terminators.
3- 4
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Generator Configuration
1.
Right click on the Generate soft key to display the Generate Configuration
menu and configure each parameter as described in the following steps:
a. Click the arrow next to the Signal Type field to show the available
choices and select the signal type needed for your testing.
b. Click on the arrow next to the Sequence field. and select the name of the
sequence you want to generate from the list that is displayed.
Ferris+
Flower+
Only sequences that are valid for the selected signal type are displayed.
Select either a Header Only or Header Plus test sequence to be sent. A
Header Plus file is designated by a + symbol following the sequence
name.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 5
Reference
If the reference sequence you want to use for the capture is not shown in
the list, load it from the appropriate CD-ROM compact disc containing
the reference video test sequences. Refer to Installing the Generator and
Reference Sequences on page B--12 for further information on installing
video test sequences.
2. Select the number of times you want the sequence to repeat from the
following generator behavior choices:
H
Single Shot generates the selected video sequence one time. When
generating NTSC or PAL video sequences, a single-shot sequence is two
times with NTSC and four times with PAL. Each sequences is sent in a
different color phase so that the different color phases for the selected
format (NTSC or PAL) are all sent. The analyzer captures the sequence
with the color phase that matches the stored reference so that a correct
comparison can be made.
H
Loop Count lets you specify the number of times the test sequence is
generated before the generator stops. A complete test sequence for
NTSC is two times with alternate color phases. For PAL, it is four times.
H
Continuous Looping repeats the selected video sequence indefinitely.
3. If you are testing an analog video device, continue with step 4. For serial
digital video testing, go to step 5.
4. Click the Encoder soft key to display the Encoder Configuration menu.
a. Select Gaussian or Brickwall filter. The Gaussian filter is the preferred
selection for typical operation of the encoder.
b. Set the Lockup (genlock) choice to Serial Video or Black Burst,
depending on your genlock signal. If you do not have a reference
composite video or black burst signal, select Serial Video and disconnect
the Serial Black Out from the generator DSP Channel B In connector.
3- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
If you select Black Burst as the Lockup choice, do not connect a serial
digital signal to the generator Channel A In connector. That input has the
priority to provide genlock to the generator.
Refer to Encoder Configuration Menu on page 2--24 for further
information on genlocking with serial video or analog video (composite
or black burst).
c. Click the OK button to accept the changes and go back to the Generate
Configuration menu.
5. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the Generate Configure menu.
Capture Configuration
To capture a video sequence, you must configure these capture parameters:
H
Signal type.
H
Capture as a test, as a reference, or as a user sequence.
H
Capture name (alias or default).
H
Reference sequence to use for the measurements. This choice is not active
for capturing as a user sequence.
H
Time Out (the time to wait for a valid test sequence).
H
Auto Measure immediately after the capture or defer the measurement until
you select it manually.
H
Auto Save or manually save the captured sequence to a file on the hard disk.
H
Decoder set up for testing analog video.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 7
Reference
Capture as a Test. Use the following steps to capture a test sequence:
1. Right click the Capture soft key to display the Capture Configuration menu.
2. Click the arrow next to the signal type field to display the available choices.
3. Click on the signal type you want to capture to select it.
4. Click on the arrow next to the Reference Sequence field to display the
available reference sequences.
3- 8
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
The list contains all the stored references for the selected signal type. Click
either on the reference sequence you want to use for the capture to select it or
choose Any Valid Sequence. The name you select must either be the same as
the one you selected to generate or a special testing reference that is based on
the sequence you selected to generate. Refer to Creating a Testing Reference
on page 3--20 for information on capturing a sequence as a new reference.
5. In the Capture Configuration menu, check that Capture As a test is enabled.
Leave the alias name field completely blank to accept the default file name.
Enter an alias file name to more easily identify the captured file and the
results when recalling them for review. Refer to step 8 to see how the default
or alias file name is developed. The format type and time stamp is added to
the file name.
NOTE. Even if you use an alias name for the test file, the correct reference to
compare it to is determined from the header ID of the sequence. That reference
becomes associated with the alias name. You cannot use the same alias name to
capture the same sequence or another sequence using Any Valid Sequence. You
must select the correct reference name to capture. If you forget what the correct
reference for the alias file name is, you can play back the sequence and view the
reference video (click the R in the Video Controls) to see the associated reference
sequence.
6. Click in the Auto Measure check box to disable automatic measurement of
the captured video test sequence (if enabled) to defer measurement until you
select to start it.
You can choose to measure the captured video test sequence automatically
by selecting Auto Measure. If you select Auto Measure, make sure the
measurements are configured as you want in the Measure Configuration
menu before you start to capture the video test sequence.
7. If you select the Time Out feature, click in the Time Out field and enter the
time to wait for a valid test sequence. If a sequence is not received within the
waiting period, the capture is aborted, and the PQA300 system returns to the
doing nothing state.
Enter time in the following format:
30 seconds = 00:30
1 minute and 30 seconds = 01:30
8. Select Auto Save to automatically save a captured sequence to a hard disk
file. The default name for the file is taken from the header of the sequence
and the time stamp of the capture as follows:
nameyyyymmddhhmmss
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 9
Reference
where name is the sequence name from the header, yyyy is the year, mm is the
month, dd is the day of the month, hh is the hour (in a 24 hour clock), mm is
the minute of the hour, and ss is the second of the minute.
9. If you are testing an analog video device, continue with step 10, otherwise
go to step 11.
10. Set up the Decoder to accept Composite or S-Video (Y/C) as appropriate for
your device under test. Use the following procedure for the Option 01
decoder.
a. Click in the selection circle for the input video type you want to test. The
processing selections for each type are different as shown below.
Adaptive Frame is not available for PAL format composite video and
Simple is the only processing available for PAL format S-Video.
b. Click on the processing type you want to use for the test. Only the
processing types appropriate for the input format and type you selected
are shown. Refer to Decoder Configuration Menu on page 2--30 for
further information about processing selections.
c. Click the OK button to accept the changes and go to the Capture
Configuration menu.
11. Click on the OK soft key to accept the changes and exit the Capture
Configuration menu.
3- 10
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Capture as a Reference. The steps for capturing as a reference are the same as
capturing as a test with one exception: set the Capture As selection to Reference.
Giving the captured reference an alias name helps to identify the reference for
future use. One example of a descriptive alias name is “PAL Notch Ref” where
PAL is the signal type captured, Notch is the type of process filtering used for
the capture, and Ref designates it as a reference. If you are capturing a Header
Plus test sequence, a + symbol is automatically added to the alias name. Refer to
Creating a Testing Reference on page 3--20 for more information about capturing
a video test signal as a reference.
Capture as a User Sequence. Capture as a User Sequence is a special capture
from the incoming video signal. To use this feature, follow the steps for Capture
as a test except for the following:
1. Set Capture As to User Sequence and give the sequence a distinctive alias
name for recognition.
2. Select either Header Only or Header Plus to apply striping to the captured
video sequence; select No Header to capture the sequence without striping.
You can apply striping to the unstriped captured sequence by generating the
unstriped sequence and capturing it with one of the striping types selected.
3. Click on OK to accept the changes and exit the Capture Configuration menu.
4. Click on the Capture soft key to initiate the User Sequence capture process.
The Capture soft key label changes to Start.
5. Click on the Start soft key to start a five-second video generate sequence
capture at a point in the incoming video signal so that the reference portion
of the capture contains the video material you want. A two-second sequence
consisting of the third and fourth seconds of the capture is automatically
extracted as the reference.
6. Once captured with striping and saved, the user video test sequence is
available for use in testing.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 11
Reference
Configure Measurements
Use the following steps to configure the measurements you want for the captured
video test sequence:
1. Right click on the Measure soft key to display the Measure Configuration
menu.
2. Select the test sequence you want to measurement. You can select any test
sequence in the file to measure, but the default is the last captured test
sequence.
3. Set Save Results to None, Values, or Values and the Maps. Saving Values
and Maps is the default choice.
4. Select the picture quality measurements to make. You can choose the PQR
Luma measurement, the PQR Luma & Chroma measurement, the PSNR
Luma measurement, or all three to be made on the video test sequence. One
of these choice must be selected.
3- 12
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
5. Set the PQR and PSNR parameters. The PQR parameter settings menu
shown below provides for turning limits on or off and setting the limits for
both the (Y) Luma and the (YC) Luma & Chroma measurement. The PSNR
parameters provide for turning limits on or off and setting the limits for the
PSNR Luma measurement.
6. Select Use Limits if you want limits to be displayed in the graph and detail
results.
7. Set the lower and upper limit values for both the (Y) Luma and (YC) Luma
& Chroma picture quality measurements. If you enter limits that are not
applicable to the measurements, the limit markers may be off the screen, and
the measurement results may all show up as out of limits.
8. Select the Advanced setting for PQR parameters to check the default settings
for the Display Model Parameters. These values are not changed for typical
operation of the PQA300 system, but they may have been changed as part of
a previous testing procedure or by a preference setup. Refer to Display
Model Parameters on page 3--32 for further information on setting the
advanced PQR parameters.
9. Click on the Defaults soft key in the Display Model Parameters configuration menu to restore the defaults setting for all the parameters in the menu,
and then click on OK to accept the changes. The Phosphor Properties default
values are slightly different for 601--525 and 601-625 formats. Clicking on
Defaults sets the values for the selected test sequence format.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 13
Reference
Set the Signal Quality
Parameters
You can choose not to apply signal conditioning. The following procedure
applies signal conditioning for the test. To set the Signal Quality parameters,
follow these steps:
1. In the Measure Configuration menu, select Apply Signal Conditioning.
2. Click on the Parameters soft key to display the Signal Quality menu shown
below.
3. Select the Use Detected Parameters feature.
4. Select the Use Limits feature if you want limits shown. The default limits
will be used unless you change them. Some experimentation is required to
determine any limit setting changes needed for your specific testing
application. Appropriate limits can be determined from the results you obtain
from the measurements for the device under test and the video test sequence
used in the test.
5. Click OK to accept changes and go to the Measure Configuration menu.
6. Click OK in the Measure Configuration menu to accept all the changes and
exit the menu.
3- 14
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Apply Sub Region
Use the Apply Sub Region feature to select a specific area or a specific range of
fields to include in the measurements. If you want all the fields and all of the
field area included in the measurement, leave this choice unchecked in the
Measure Configuration menu.
1. To use Apply Sub Region for the special measurement selections click in the
Apply Sub Region check box, and then click on the Parameters soft key to
display the Sub-Region parameters menu.
2. Select All Fields to include all 120 fields of the video test sequence in the
measurement.
3. Select Range to activate the From and To edit boxes.
4. Edit the From and To values to define the range of fields to include in the
measurements.
5. Set the Edge Cropping limits to define the area of a sub region to measure as
described in the following steps:
a. If you want to define the area numerically, use the four edit boxes to set
the limit for each edge individually and then proceed to step f.
b. If you want to define the area visually in one of the video displays, click
the Define soft key to display the Define Sub Region screen and then
perform the following steps:
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 15
Reference
c. Draw a region of interest box by clicking the mouse button, holding
down and dragging. Release the mouse button. If the region is not the
correct size, redraw the box if it is not the right size.
d. Once the box is drawn, you can reposition it in the display using one of
the following methods:
H
Place the mouse cursor in the box and click and hold the right mouse
button down. Drag the mouse to reposition the box within the screen
area.
H
Click outside of the box with the right mouse button. The repositioned box is centered around the mouse cursor unless any of the box
edges would exceed the screen limits in the new position. In that
case, the box is positioned either horizontally or vertically, but it is
not centered around the cursor.
e. Click the Set Region soft key (the label changes on the Measure soft key
during the define process) to return to the Sub Region parameters menu.
The edge cropping values for the region you defined are automatically
entered in the Edge Cropping edit boxes.
f.
Click OK to return to the Measure Configuration menu.
6. Click OK in the Measure Configuration menu to accept the changes and exit
the menu.
3- 16
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Start the Test
After you configure the generator, capture, and measure choices for the signal
you want, and connect the generator and analyzer cables to the system to be
tested, you are ready to start the test.
1. Click the Generate soft key to turn on the generator. After the sequence
generate file is loaded to memory from the hard drive, the test sequence is
generated.
2. Click the Capture soft key to start the capture mode.
The PQA300 system waits for the selected sequence to be recognized. When
the sequence is recognized, it is captured in memory. If Auto Save is
selected, the captured test sequence is also automatically saved to a file on
the hard disk drive. If Time Out is enabled, and a valid test sequence does
not occur in the specified time out, the PQA300 system stops looking for the
sequence and returns to the inactive state.
If you selected Auto Measure in the Capture Configuration menu, the
configured measurement is taken immediately after the captured test
sequence is saved to the hard disk drive. Otherwise, the measurement is
postponed until you start the measurement manually (see step 4).
3. When the capture has completely finished, if you want to stop sending the
signal, click on the Generate soft key to turn off the generator.
4. If you did not select Auto Measure, click the Measure soft key to start the
configured measurements.
Viewing Measurement
Results
After the video test sequence is captured and measured, a Summary results table
is displayed. Measurement results for the captured test sequence are available as
a summary, as field-by-field details, as a graphical display, and as a video picture
difference sequence.
Use the measurement results to determine overall picture quality or to examine
specific fields of a video test sequence for problem areas. Refer to Results
Displays on page 2--46 for examples of the results displays and operating
information regarding the legend box controls in the graph results display.
Use the following steps to view the measurement results:
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 17
Reference
1. Right click the results selection soft key (labeled Video in following figure)
to display the selection choices in a popup menu.
2. Select the results display you want. The button label changes to show the
active display type: Summary, Details, Graph, or Video. If a choice is not
available for the present application, it is grayed out.
3. Scroll through the other results displays by clicking the results selection soft
key. The soft key label changes to show the currently displayed results.
Recalling Results Files
Results are available for display immediately after making the measurements on
a captured test sequence or when recalled for display by clicking on the Results
soft key (if the selections in the Results Configuration menu are valid).
After a measurement is made, the default results display is the Summary table. If
you are calling up results using the Results soft key, the default display is the
graph results.
3- 18
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Set up the Results
Configuration
Following a test sequence capture and measure, results are displayed for the
captured test sequence. To view results from previously saved results files use
the following procedure:
1. Right click the Results soft key to open the Results Configuration menu
shown below.
2. Click the Clear Selection soft key to clear all the selections.
3. The available results are displayed in the Sequences field. Select one or more
of the sequences for viewing. If you select one results file, all the selected
results for that file are displayed. If you select more than one result file, a
graphical results display shows each one for comparison.
4. In the Results Configuration menu, select (highlight) the test sequence for
which you want video results. All of the summary, graph, and details results
for each sequence you checked are recalled for viewing and comparison, but
video results (captured video and maps) are recalled only for the highlighted
test sequence. The highlighted test sequence must also be selected (checked).
5. Select the type of test results: select the Luma test results for either the PQR
measurement or the PSNR measurement or both. For the PQR measurement,
you can also select the Luma & Chroma results if they are available. You can
compare multiple test results of the same video sequence or you can compare
the PQR and PSNR results for one or more video sequences.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 19
Reference
You would not typically select different types of video test sequences for
display (for instance, Ferris and Flower) to compare. The usual selection is
to compare results from a testing series that was created using the same
video sequence with varying conditions or parameters for the device under
test.
6. Click OK to exit the Results Configuration menu.
7. Click the Results soft key to begin recalling the selected results from the
hard drive for display.
Creating a Testing
Reference
The captured test video is measured with respect to the standard digital reference
video unless a different reference is designated. Typically, you want to test a
device without showing the influence of the Option 01 encoder and decoder. To
reduce or eliminate encoder and decoder effects from the test, you must capture
an appropriate reference signal to de-embed those effects from the testing
reference. The effects of the PQA300 encoder and decoder will be in the captured
testing reference.
NOTE. If you are testing a device that is expected to have an external composite
encoder and decoder, the overall system effects are better simulated by not
de-embedding the Option 01 encoder and decoder effects. Do the testing using
one of the Tektronix 601 sequences provided as the reference sequence to
measure the total system effect on picture quality.
When the external device to test is placed in the system and a test video sequence
is captured, the measurement does not see the effects of the PQA300 encoder and
decoder as differences (or the differences are at least greatly reduced). The
picture quality measurement therefore reflects the effects of the device under test
more closely when measured with respect to the captured reference rather than
with respect to the Tektronix-supplied reference video sequence.
Use the following procedure to capture the video test sequence as a reference:
1. Restore the default settings for the PQA300 system by selecting the factory
preset in the Preferences menu.
The factory preset restores all of the settings to known selections and values.
The restored configuration is a good beginning state for configuring a new
test procedure. Refer to Preference Configuration Menu on page 2--63. After
you set up the system for the composite signal test, you can save the settings
in a preset file. You can restore the configuration settings later by selecting
the preset in the Preference menu.
3- 20
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
2. Connect the signal cables with the output of the encoder directly to the input
of the decoder, as shown below, to characterize the system without the DUT
(device under test). You can use a similar setup when testing a device that
takes a 601 signal in and generates an S-Video (Y/C) signal.
Composite signal
Decoder - Composite In
PQA300
Encoder - Composite Out
3. Set up the system to generate a test sequence as follows:
a. Right click the Generate soft key to display the Generate Configuration
menu.
b. In the Generate Configuration menu, select the Signal Type as NTSC,
NTSC No Setup, or PAL as appropriate for the device under test.
c. Select either a Header Only or a Header Plus version of the test sequence
you want to capture as a new reference. Header Plus files are designated
by a + symbol following the name. The sequence name you select to
generate is also the name of the test sequence you select to capture.
NOTE. If the appropriate test sequence for the signal type you need is not in the
list of possible choices, you must load the sequence file before you can continue.
d. Select Continuous looping operation. Each sequence of an NTSC or PAL
format video sequence is sent with a different color phase. The analyzer
waits for the color phase that matches the stored reference before
capturing the video sequence, either as a reference or as a test.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 21
Reference
NOTE. The PQA300 system generator alternates the color phase by sending an
odd number of fields in each video test sequence. For NTSC, 149 fields are sent,
and for PAL 125 fields are sent. If you use the reference test video sequences to
create video test sequences to send from a source other than the PQA300 system
generator for NTSC testing, send only 149 fields rather than the 150 fields of the
generator reference video sequences supplied on the CD-ROM. If you create a
testing reference with an even number of fields (for either NTSC or PAL) that
does not match the color phase of the stored reference, it will not be captured.
e. Set up your encoder or the Option 01 encoder for generating an analog
video test signal. Continue with step f for the Option 01 encoder.
f.
Click the Encoder soft key to display the Encoder Configuration menu.
g. Select the filter type as Gaussian or Brickwall. Gaussian is the typical
choice for most testing purposes.
h. Select the Lockup (genlock) source. Use Black Burst if you have an
analog reference to connect to the encoder genlock in connector. If you
do not have an analog reference, use Serial Video to genlock to the
generator DSP serial digital output video.
i.
Click OK in the Encoder Configuration menu to accept the changes and
go to the Generator Configuration menu.
j.
Click OK to accept all the changes and exit the Generate Configuration
menu.
4. Set up the system to capture the test sequence as a reference as follows:
a. Right click on the Capture soft key to display the Capture Configuration
menu.
b. Select the signal type as you set the generator. Use 601-525 or 601-625
if you are using your own encoder and decoder. Use NTSC, NTSC No
Setup or PAL if you are using the Option 01 encoder and decoder.
c. In the Capture Configuration menu, select the name of the sequence that
you selected to generate.
d. In the Capture As box, select Reference. The captured signal will be
saved in the reference directory.
NOTE. You can choose to capture this test sequence as a test if you want to check
the effects of the encoder/decoder on the picture quality. The captured test
sequence is then measured against the stored reference video test sequence.
3- 22
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
e. In the Reference name edit field, type a file name for your new reference
video sequence. This name is an alias for you to use as an identifier. The
alias name is mapped into the list of references. You can select it later
when you capture the same video sequence again for testing the effects
of the DUT on the signal.
f.
Enable Auto Save for the captured reference signal. The captured
reference video sequence will be automatically saved to the hard disk
drive with the file name you entered previously.
g. Click the Decoder soft key in the Option 01 Capture Configuration menu
to display the Decoder Configuration menu.
5. Set up the Decoder to accept Composite or S-Video (Y/C) as appropriate for
your device under test as follows:
a. Click the selection circle for the input video type you want to test.
b. Select the appropriate processing. Only the processing appropriate for
the input format and type you selected are shown. For de-embedding of
the encoder and decoder effects from an NTSC or PAL capture, the best
processing choice is Notch. For S-Video the best choice is Simple
processing. Refer to Decoder Configuration Menu on page 2--30 for
further information about processing selections.
c. Click the OK button to accept changes and exit to the Capture Configuration menu.
d. Click the OK button in the Capture Configuration menu to accept
changes and exit the menu.
6. Click the Generate soft key to start generating the test signal.
7. Click the Capture soft key to start the reference capture. The sequence will
be captured when it is recognized. With Auto Save enabled, it will be saved
to the PQA300/reference directory.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 23
Reference
Insert the Device to Test
Connect the composite device to test between between the decoder and encoder
as shown below.
The generated test signal now passes through the device for testing. The effect
the composite device has on the picture quality is measured by the PQA300
system when compared to the reference you have just captured.
Composite signal
Composite
device
Composite signal
Decoder - composite in
PQA300
Encoder - composite out
Using the New Testing
Reference
After you capture the new reference, the setup for generating, capturing, and
measuring a test video sequence is exactly the same as testing using one of the
standard references.
1. Set up the generator to generate the same video test sequence you used to
create the reference in step 3c on page 3--21.
2. Set up the PQA300 system to capture the signal as a test. Make sure that the
newly created reference is selected as the sequence to capture. This selection
sets the reference to use for the measurement. The measurements you select
in the Measure Configuration menu are made on the captured video
sequence. The effects of the encoder and decoder are included in the testing
reference you created. Any additional differences between the captured test
sequence and the new reference are due to the analog device being tested.
3. Set up the PQA300 system to make the desired measurement on the captured
test sequence. Make the necessary setup adjustments for the test.
4. Click the Capture soft key to start the capture.
5. Click the left mouse button on the Generate soft key to begin the test. As
soon as the sequence is recognized, the sequence is captured to memory and
saved to a hard disk file.
3- 24
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
6. If Auto Measure is not enabled, click the Measure soft key to start the
measurements you configured. When the measurements complete (it takes
some time), the measurement results are saved and the summary results table
is displayed. If Auto Measure is enabled, the measurements you configured
start automatically after the capture.
Disk Space Management
During a testing session, it is possible to run out of disk storage space on the
hard drive. You can take precautions with the files to prevent this from
happening.
Disk Full Prevention
Remove the older captures and results files that are no longer needed to make
room for the newer files of the current testing. If you need to save the results of
those tests, save them to disk as ASCII text files. Saving the results to disk keeps
the summary results of the testing for record keeping.
You can save the captures and results to a network server that has a larger storage
device. The captured test files are about 50 Mbytes each. Save only those files
that are required for showing the results of a test. You will generate many capture
and results files that are not needed after you know the results of the tests. Delete
the unnecessary files at the end of a testing session so that disk space is available
for the next testing session.
Disk Full Error Correction
If you see the “no disk space available” error during a capture or measure, delete
some of the stored capture and results files. You can use the file operations
dialog box to review and delete capture and results files. You can also use this
dialog box to store files on a connected network storage device if they must be
saved before deleting them from the hard drive.
You can also use the Windows NT file manager to review, move, and delete files
from the appropriate PQA300 directory. Once you remove user files to regain
disk space, you may want to use the Recompute Database feature found in the
menu selections under the Other soft key. Refer to Recompute Database on
page 2--68 for additional information on how to use the Recompute Database
selection. You may also want to empty the Windows NT Recycle Bin.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 25
Reference
Creating a User Sequence
You can add calibration striping to a segment of your own video to create a
generate and reference test sequence. It may take more than one try to capture the
exact fields you want for your test sequence. You must start the capture of the
incoming video at the right time to include any special event of interest in the
incoming video material.
To create the user sequence, perform the following steps:
1. Right click the Capture soft key to display the Capture Configuration menu.
2. In the Signal Type field, select the type of video you are using.
3. In the Capture As box, select User Sequence.
4. Select either Header Only or Header Plus striping if you want to add the
calibration striping to the captured sequence. Select No Header if you want
to capture a five-second video sequence without striping.
5. Give your new sequence a name that you can remember.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the menu.
7. Click the Capture soft key. The input video is displayed and the Capture soft
key label changes to Start with a red indicator.
8. Click the Start soft key to begin the capture two seconds prior to a portion of
the incoming video that you want to save as a reference.
3- 26
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
A five-second generate sequence is captured. A two-second reference
sequence composed of the third and fourth seconds of the captured sequence
is automatically extracted. The generate and reference sequences are
automatically stored with generate sequence first, followed by the reference
sequence.
Function Operations
Use the Function feature to run system tasks using scripted function files stored
in the PQA300 system function file library. The files can be created using the
Learn mode, modified using the Function Edit window, or prescripted using an
ASCII editor to construct a function file.
Running a Function
The selected function runs when you click the Function soft key. Use the
following steps to make a function selection:
1. Right click the Function soft key to display the Function Configuration
menu shown below.
2. Deselect Activate Learn Mode if it is selected.
3. Click the Function menu selection list, and then use the mouse cursor to
select a named function file from the functions stored in the function library.
4. Click the OK soft key to make the selection and exit the Function Configuration menu.
5. Click the Function soft key to run the selected function.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 27
Reference
Using Learn Mode
The PQA300 system provides a Learn Mode for you to create functions. The
following procedure is a general outline for creating a function using the learning
capability.
1. Click the Function soft key to display the Function Configuration menu
shown below.
2. Click in the Activate Learn Mode selection box to enable the learn mode.
3. Select the initialization used to begin the learn mode commands. The
selection you make determines the first command line in the function script
file accumulated during the learning process.
H
“Don’t Initialize To Preference” omits any initialization for the learn
function.
H
“Overwrite & Start With Current Preference” adds a command line that
initializes the PQA300 system to the configuration in the preference file
that is selected in the Preference Configuration menu.
H
“Save & Start With New Preference” adds a command line that saves the
present PQA300 system configuration into a new preference file and
initializes the system to the new preference file configuration. Give the
new preference file a name that describes its purpose.
4. Click OK to exit the Function Configuration menu.
5. Click the Function soft key to start the learning process (function recording).
The Function soft key is renamed to Learning, and the soft key indicator
changes to red to show that a learn process is in operation.
3- 28
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
6. Complete the learn process by making all the control selections needed to
perform your task. This includes generating a sequence, capturing a
sequence, and measuring a sequence.
7. When all the selected processes are finished, click Learning again to stop the
recording session.
8. In the Save As window that appears (shown below), give the new function a
name you can remember and click Save. The recorded steps are stored in the
function library as a Tcl file with the name you give it.
Editing a Function
The Learn Mode only allows for the creation of functions that can be done using
control settings. However, you can use the text editor to add other commands or
modify existing function files to create new functions. The function script is a set
of TCL programming commands. The script can be edited to add looping,
branching, or other TCL commands, and to call other functions to make a
function list. Refer to Appendix I: Tcl Function Commands for a listing of the
function commands and an explanation of the command grammar. Refer to the
following information on Sample Function Files for examples of Tcl programming used to create functions for the PQA300 system.
Sample Function Files. Some sample function files are provided in the
PQA300/function directory. Use the sample files as examples of Tcl programming and as starting points for creating your own function files. The supplied
samples are the following:
H
The “capture 5 measure later” sample function captures five sequences, and
schedules the measurement for 1:30 am today (if it is currently before
1:31 am) or tomorrow. You can easily edit this sample to capture a different
number of sequences and make the measurements at a different time of your
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 29
Reference
choosing. This sample function calls append from the “function/save
results.tcl” function to add the results to a file named “saved_results/measure
later.txt.”
H
The “measure all captures” sample function measures all existing capture
files.
H
The “save all measurements” sample function saves results from all existing
measurement result files into the “saved_results/all_measurement.txt” file. It
first defines the procedure “save_all_measurements,” and then calls it.
H
The “test 20” sample function loops 20 time, each time capturing and
measuring a sequence, appending the results to the “saved_results/test
20.txt” file.
H
The “test userStriped” sample function loops forever, each time generating,
capturing, and measuring a sequence. The iteration cycles through all
existing userStriped reference sequences, appending the results to the
“saved_results/test userStriped.txt” file.
You can add other samples and develop a sample function library for your
measurements.
Editing Procedure. Edit a function script as follows:
1. In the Function Configuration menu, select the name of the function file to
edit. The default selection is the function file just created using Learn Mode.
3- 30
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
2. Click the Edit soft key to display the Function Edit window shown below.
The text file for the function selected is displayed for review or editing.
3. Make any needed changes to the file using the edit functions of the keyboard
and the soft keys of the Function Edit menu.
4. Click the Check for Errors soft key. The function file is compiled and
checked for syntax errors.
5. Any errors found in the function file are given in the Check window. Click
an error to go to the error line in the function script file.
6. When all errors are corrected, and no further errors are found, click Save to
save the function file. The Save As window is displayed for saving the file.
Select a file name to write over the file or enter a new file name to save the
new function file without changing the old file.
7. Click the OK soft key to go to the Function Configuration menu.
PC Edit File. When you use a PC to create a function, give the file a meaningful
name and use a .tcl file extension. To add the externally created file to the
function library from a floppy disk, use either the Windows NT file transfer
capability or the PQA300 file utility (refer to File Operations on page 2--66).
Copy the new function file to the D:\PQA300\functions directory.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 31
Reference
Display Model Parameters
NOTE. The Display Model Parameters menu for the PQR measurement provides
settings for changing some values that may affect the JNDmetrixt human-vision
system measurement algorithm. The default parameter settings are shown in
Figure 3--4. If you change the parameters, you can revert to the default values by
clicking on the Default soft key.
Figure 3- 4: Display Model Parameters menu for setting the advanced PQR
parameters
The JNDmetrix algorithm measurements are based on the default value settings
for the display model at a viewing distance of four times the screen height. Do
not change the display model parameters for normal operation of the PQA300
Picture Quality Analysis System. An understanding of colorimetry and display
models is needed to adjust these parameters correctly. Click on the Default soft
key to restore all the settings to their default values.
3- 32
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
The default phosphor property settings for the display model are based on
recommendations from SMPTE RP 145-1994, SMPTE C Color Monitor
Colorimetry for 525/59. Phosphor properties values recommended by this
standard are shown in Table 3--1.
Table 3- 1: SMPTE RP 145 phosphor properties
Red
Green
Blue
White, D65
x
0.630
0.310
0.155
0.3127
y
0.340
0.595
0.070
0.3290
z
0.030
0.095
0.775
0.3582
For 625/50, the defaults are based on the values found in EBU Tech. 3213, EBU
standard for chromaticity tolerances for studio monitors. The EBU values are
given in Table 3--2.
Table 3- 2: EBU phosphor properties
Red
Green
Blue
White, D65
x
0.640
0.290
0.150
0.3127
y
0.330
0.600
0.060
0.3290
z
0.030
0.110
0.790
0.3582
Another industry standard, ITU-R BT709, Basic Parameters for the HDTV
Standard for Studio and International Program Exchange, has slightly different
values. The Rec. 709 values are given in Table 3--3
Table 3- 3: Rec. 709 phosphor properties
Red
Green
Blue
White, D65
x
0.640
0.300
0.150
0.3127
y
0.330
0.600
0.060
0.3290
z
0.030
0.100
0.790
0.3582
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 33
Reference
Some useful reference information on Gamma and Color is found on the internet
at http://www.inforamp.net/~poynton/Poynton-color.html. Charles A.
Poynton writes and maintains a set of frequently asked questions (FAQ) on
aspects of color that are important to color image coding, computer graphics,
image processing, video, and the transfer of digital images to print. The FAQ on
Gamma discusses the nonlinearity of display devices in the reproduction of
intensity. Both documents list many other references on the topics of color and
gamma.
Selection
Definition
Maximum
Luminance
Setting range: 65 to 350 candelas per square meter.
Gamma
Setting range: 2 to 3 with a default of 2.4.
The default value of 100 candelas per square meter represents the
normalized brightness of the maximum RGB value of 255.
The Gamma value setting affects the contrast in the midrange values of
brightness in the display device. A lower Gamma setting signifies a more
linear display response, and a higher Gamma setting is needed for a less
linear display response.
Display devices are nonlinear in response to the driving stimulus. The same
change in voltage does not produce the same brightness change at different
levels of display brightness. For example, when the display is dim, a small
change in voltage can produce a much larger change in brightness than
when the display is already at a high brightness level. Gamma is a measure
of the difference between the change that should have been seen had the
display response been linear and the actual brightness change seen. A
display device with a Gamma value of 1 would have a perfectly linear
response.
Clipping
Threshold
Setting range: 0 to 0.5.
Ambient Light
Setting range: 0 to 345 candelas per square meter (maximum luminance).
The default value of 0.063 represents the normalized voltage level of display
cutoff (black) based on the normalized maximum luminance setting (100 is
normalized to 1). Decreasing the clipping threshold lowers the black level so
that dim objects become brighter, and increasing the clipping threshold
causes dim objects to become darker or black.
This value represents the ambient light level when viewing the display. A
nominal setting of 5 is the default.
3- 34
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Reference
Selection
Definition
Phosphor
Properties
Setting range: 0 to 0.75 for X and 0 to 0.85 for Y.
The phosphor default values depend on the signal format being measured.
For 601-525, the default phosphor properties are based on the SMPTE
values given in Table 3-- 1. For 601-625, the default phosphor properties are
based on the EBU values given in Table 3-- 2. Click the Default soft key to
set the new defaults when changing between 601-525 and 601-625 video
measurements.
The red, blue, and green phosphors in a display do not have the same
response in color output for the same amount of electron beam intensity
striking them. The default phosphor properties of the JND algorithm are
selected as nominal values for the color responses. If your display device
has different color responses than the nominal values selected, you can
adjust the phosphor properties to more closely represent those of your
display system. You will have to know the values you want to change and by
how much.
Default
If you have made a change, you can click Default to reset all the parameters
back to their default values. The effect of changing between the two default
value sets for phosphor properties is minimal on the PQR values obtained
when the sequence is measured.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
3- 35
Reference
3- 36
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendices
Appendix A: Specifications
The specification tables contain the following types of information:
H
Specification. Performance requirements or characteristics of equipment and
certain programming material.
H
Characteristic. A property of the product.
H
Description. Description of a characteristic, usually in limit form. This
statement is considered to be binding on the company (seller), and can be
verified by performing the appropriate portion of the Performance Verification Procedure, or by a separate and available procedure.
H
Supplemental information. Statements that explain performance requirements or provide performance information. These are not considered to be
statements of guaranteed performance.
Performance Conditions
The Performance requirements are valid within the environmental limits if the
instrument was adjusted at 25 _C ± 5 _C and you allowed a minimum warm-up
time of 20 minutes.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
A- 1
Appendix A: Specifications
Hardware Specifications
Table A- 1: DSP board
Characteristic
Description
Supplemental information
Input Signal Format
Receives 270 MB/s serial digital signal
Complies with ITU-- R BT.601, BT.656, and
SMPTE 259M
Channel A: 601 In and 601 Out
Active loop-through, BNC, 75 Ω terminating
Channel 2: Ref In and Ref Out
Active loop-through SMB, 75 Ω terminating
Channel 1 to Channel 2 Isolation
30 dB to 300 MHz
Input Return Loss
At least 15 dB (1 MHz to 270 MHz), with
power on
Serial Receiver Equalization Range
Proper operation with coaxial cable up to
14.5 dB loss at 135 MHz. Typical operation;
to 300 meters with Belden 8281 coaxial
cable.
Active loop-through output
characteristics
Meets SMPTE 259M levels and rise and
fall times. No reclocking is done on
loop-through output.
Loop Output Return Loss
At least 15 dB (1 MHz to 270 MHz), with
power on
Output Signal Format
270 MB/s serial digital signal
Complies with ITU-- R BT.601, BT.656, and
SMPTE 259M. Exception: output frequency
accuracy only specified when not referenced to an external input signal.
Output impedance
75 Ω
Return Loss
At least 15 dB (1 to 270 MHz), with power
on
Output level
800 mV ± 80mV
Rise/Fall
0.3 ns to 1.2 ns, measured 20% to 80%
Jitter - Internal Reference
Less than 0.2 UI, typically 0.3 ns peak-topeak
Jitter - External Reference
Depends on the reference input. Typically
peaking at 0.05 dB. Jitter attenuation 3 dB
point is typically at 650 kHz.
Frequency
270 Mbit/s
Frequency accuracy
±1.5 ppm over temperature range plus
±1 ppm per year drift, when using the
internal oscillator.
Output Connector
BNC
A- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix A: Specifications
Table A- 2: NTSC/PAL Decoder board
Characteristic
Performance requirement
Supplemental information
Input Channels
Video Format
NTSC, NTSC No Setup,
PAL (B, D, G, H, and I)
Composite Input type
Passive loop-through, 75 Ω, compensated, BNC
Return loss
40 dB up to 6 MHz on composite video
Loop-through insertion loss
0.6dB Max to 6MHz for composite video
Input amplitude range
Hum range
+5%, - 20% typical
0.5 V peak-to-peak
Frequency range
±20ppm
Genlock jitter
0.5 degree on 0 dB signal, - 20dB hum,
- 50dB SNR
S-- Video Input type
Standard S-Video and connector. No
loop-through, terminated.
Return loss
25 dB typical
601 Out (serial digital video)
Connectors
One BNC, one SMB. Identical signals on
both output connectors.
Format
270 MB/s serial component only
Output level
800 mV ± 80mV
Rise/Fall
0.4 ns to 1.2 ns, measured 20% to 80%
Jitter
< 0.2UI above 10 Hz
Complies with ITU-R BT.601, BT.656, and
SMPTE 259M
Output impedance
75 Ω, 15dB return loss 5 to 270 MHz
Frequency
270 Mbit/s nominal, tracks input signal
Output mode
8 bit or 9 bit, not user selectable
Conversion Accuracy
Gain
1 ± 2% low frequency
Flatness
1% to 5 MHz for luma, relative to 500 kHz
Luma linearity
2%
Differential Gain
1%
Differential Phase
1 degree
Black Level Error
10 mV
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
A- 3
Appendix A: Specifications
Table A- 3: NTSC/PAL Encoder board
Characteristic
Performance requirement
Supplemental information
Genlock (analog black burst) input
Burst locks to NTSC or PAL composite
video
Does not lock to monochrome input video
Format
NTSC, NTSC No Setup,
PAL (B, D, G, H, and I)
Input type
Passive loop-through, BNC, 75 Ω,
compensated
Return loss
40 dB to 6 MHz on composite video
Loop-through insertion loss
0.6 dB maximum to 6 MHz for composite
video
Color Framing (Genlocked to input
reference)
Correct color framing detected for signals
having no greater than ±45 degrees SCH
phase error. Color framing is maintained,
once obtained, until the SCH phase error
exceeds a nominal value of 125 degrees.
Burst must be present and be within ±3 dB
of nominal levels.
Burst lock jitter
SNR > 50 dB
SNR is defined as the ratio of 0.714 VP-P
video to the rms value of white gaussian
noise over a 5 MHz bandwidth.
Genlock noise performance
Genlock will be maintained with a
SNR > 40 dB or 60 Hz hum <0.714 VP-P.
Burst lock phase change with input
burst amplitude
≤2.5 degrees over a burst amplitude range
of nominal value ±3 dB
Burst lock phase change with input
signal APL
≤1 degree over input signal APL range of
10% to 90%
Output Channels
Analog video format
NTSC, NTSC No Setup,
PAL (B, D, G, H, and I)
NTSC; SMPTE 170M, with and without
pedestal. PAL; CCIR 625
75 Ω BNC
Composite output
>40 dB to 5.5 MHz at 75 Ω
Composite return loss
75 Ω Standard S-Video
S-- Video (Y/C) output
Y/C S-video crosstalk
≥50 dB down
S-video return loss
25 dB typical, to 5.5 MHz at 75 Ω
601 In
Format
A- 4
270 MB/s serial component video
Complies with ITU-R BT.601, BT.656, and
SMPTE 259M.
Input type
Non loop-through, 75 Ω terminated SMB
Return loss
≥15 dB to 270 MHz
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix A: Specifications
Table A- 3: NTSC/PAL Encoder board (cont.)
Characteristic
Performance requirement
Serial receiver equalization range
Supplemental information
Proper operation with coaxial cable up to
14.5 dB loss at 135 MHz using coaxial
cable with 1 F loss characteristics.
Nominally 150 meters of Belden 8281
coaxial cable.
Serial Black Out
Format
270 MB/s serial component video
75 Ω, SMB
Output type
Amplitude
Complies with ITU-R BT.601, BT.656, and
SMPTE 259M
800 mV± 100 mV
Rise/Fall time
0.3 ns to 1.2 ns, measurement 20% to 80%
Return loss
≥15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
Jitter
≤0.2 UI above 10 Hz. Only when burst
genlocked.
Encoder Conversion Accuracy at Output
Amplitude accuracy
Within 1%
Frequency response
Within 1% to 5 MHz, relative to 400 kHz
Group delay
10 ns or less at 5 MHz, relative to luma
transition
Luminance Linearity
≤1%, measured with a 5-step staircase
Differential Gain
≤0.5%
Differential phase
≤0.5 degree
Chrominance to Luminance Gain Error
≤2%
Chrominance to Luminance Delay
Error
≤7 ns
Field and Line Tilt
≤0.5%
S/N Ratio
≥60 dB (unweighted, 5 MHz low-pass
filtered)
Composite DC offset
≤50 mV
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
A- 5
Appendix A: Specifications
System Components
Table A- 4: System components
Characteristic
Supplemental information
Mainframe
Tektronix manufactured, common-platform mainframe
Form Factor
Rack-mountable in standard 19-inch rack. Optional local display, mouse and keyboard.
Processor
Two 400 MHz Pentium II processors
System Memory
256 MB
Real Time Clock
Real-time clock/calendar with a resolution of 1 second or less
Retention Time: Real-time clock, CMOS
setup, and PnP NVRAM
Projected battery life is typically 10 years
BIOS
Phoenix BIOS, field upgradable
Bus
32-bit PCI
Expansion Slots
8 PCI slots
Graphics
External VGA connector
1024 × 768 SVGA resolution with 32 k colors minimum
Optional local display
800 × 600 resolution with 32 k colors minimum
Non-volatile Storage
Floppy Disk drive
Standard 3.5 inch PC compatible disk drive; 1.44-- MB high-density double sided (2HD)
CD-ROM drive
PC compatible half height IDE CDROM drive, 8X
Hard Disk Drives
Standard PC compatible Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) HDD. Two drives
of 9.1 Gbyte capacity each. Captured video sequences and other user files are striped
on both hard drives.
Mainframe Interfaces
SOne loop-through ethernet port
SOne bi-directional RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 port
SOne parallel port (printer)
STwo hot-pluggable keyboard ports (on the rear panel and the left front side panel).
STwo hot-pluggable mouse ports (on the rear panel and the left front side panel).
Use either connector to connect only one keyboard and only one mouse.
External Display
SVGA Monitor
An SVGA monitor can be attached for external display of the user interface.
Digital Picture Monitor Output
An ancillary display can be attached. The output protocol is ITU-R BT.601.
Front Panel
A- 6
Virtual front panel on external display monitor; requires optional mouse and keyboard.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix A: Specifications
Table A- 4: System components (Cont.)
Characteristic
Supplemental information
Internal Display (optional local control)
LCD, 6-bit, 250 NIT, CCFL backlight, 0. 264 MM pixel
Size
10. 4 IN Diagonal
Resolution
800 X 600 (SVGA)
Touch Panel
Standard 10.4 in touch panel pointing device mounted on the surface of the TFT
display, connecting to the Front Panel Interface Board.
Table A- 5: Rear panel interface
Characteristic
Description
Parallel interface port
Port supports standard Centronics mode, Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), or Microsoft
high-speed mode (ECP) and utilizes a 25-pin D-sub connector.
Compliant with IEEE P1284-C/D2 for bi-directional Parallel Peripheral Interface for
Personal Computers (draft) style 1284-- C.
Pin assignments for compatible mode:
1. STROBE*
14. AUTOLF*
2. D0
15. ERR*
3. D1
16. INIT*
4. D2
17. SELECTIN*
5. D3
18. STROBE*
6. D4
19. GND
7. D5
20. GND
8. D6
21. GND
9. D7
22. GND
10. ACK*
23. GND
11. BUSY
24. GND
12. PaperEnd
25. GND
13. SELECT.
Serial interface port
9-pin male-D-sub connector to support RS232 serial port. Compliant to EIA/TIA 574
Pin Assignments (RS232):
1. DCD
2. RXD
3. TXD
4. DTR
5. GND
Pin Assignments (RS485):
1. RXD-2. RXD+
3. TXD+
4. TXD-5. GND
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
6. DSR
7. RTS
8. CTS
9. RI
6. CTS-7. RTS+
8. CTS+
9. RTS--
A- 7
Appendix A: Specifications
Table A- 5: Rear panel interface (Cont.)
Characteristic
Description
SVGA Output Port
15-pin female high density-D-sub SVGA connector. Compliant with EIA RS 343A.
Selectable 640 X 480 (VGA), 800 X 600, and 1024 X 768 (SVGA).
Pin assignments:
1. Red
9. (key)
2. Green
10. GND
3. Blue
11. NC
4. NC
12. NC
5. GND
13. HSYNC
6. AGND
14. VSYNC
7. AGND
15. NC
8. AGND
USB Port
Series A USB receptacle
Pin assignments:
1. Vbus
2. - Data
Ethernet Port
3. +Data
4. GND
10 Base-T/100 Base-T on PCI bus, RJ45 Connector, Plug & Plan compatible, Bus
master mode.
RJ45 Pin assignments:
1. TX+
5. NC
2. TX-6. RX-3. RX+
7. NC
4. NC
8. NC
Table A- 6: Side panel interface characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Mouse Port
PS2 compatible mouse port utilizing a mini-DIN connector. Pin assignments:
1. data
4. +5V
2. NC
5. clock
3. ground
6. NC
Keyboard Port
PS2 compatible keyboard port utilizing a mini-DIN connector. Pin assignments:
1. data
4. +5V
2. NC
5. clock
3. ground
6. NC
USB Port
Series A USB receptacle. Pin assignments:
1. Vbus
3. +data
A- 8
3. +Data
4. GND
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix A: Specifications
Power Specifications
Table A- 7: AC power source characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Source Voltage
100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, continuous range CAT II
Fuse Rating
10 A Fast / 250 V
Maximum Power Consumption
330 Watts max, 145 Watts typical
Steady State Input Current
6 Amps max, 1.25 Amps RMS typical
Inrush Surge Current
36 Amps maximum
Power Factor Correction
Yes
Mechanical (Physical) Characteristics
Table A- 8: Mechanical characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Classification
Transportable platform intended for either rackmount or bench/lab based applications.
Overall Dimensions
Height
8.5 inches (w/o feet) (21.6 cm)
Width
16.75 inches (42.5 cm)
Depth
21.5 inches (55.0 cm)
Weight
42 lb (19.1 kg)
Shipping Weight
64 lb (29.1 kg)
Construction Materials
Chassis parts are constructed of aluminum alloy and aluminized steel; front panel and trim pieces
are constructed of plastic; circuit boards are constructed of glass and/or ceramic-glass laminate.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
A- 9
Appendix A: Specifications
Environmental Characteristics
Table A- 9: Environmental characteristics
Characteristic
Description
Cooling airflow
Intake is from the front and sides of the instrument. Exhaust is to the bottom and rear of the instrument.
Required Clearance
2 in. (50 mm) air space adjacent to the bottom of the instrument is required.
Use Rating
Rated for indoor use only.
Atmospherics
Temperature:
Operating
5 °C to 40 °C (41 °F to 104 °F), 30 °C (54 °F)/hr max gradient, non-condensing (derated 1 °C or 1.8 °F
per 1,000 ft. or 305 m above 5,000 ft. or 1524 m altitude)
Non-operating
- 20 °C to 60 °C (-- 4 °F to 140 °F), 30 °C (54 °F)/hr max gradient (without disk media installed in disk
drives)
Humidity
Operating
20% to 80% relative humidity, non-condensing. Max wet bulb temperature: 29.4 °C or 84.9 °F (derates
relative humidity to ~46% at 40 °C or 104 °F)
Non-operating
8% to 80% relative humidity, non-condensing. Max wet bulb temperature: 40 °C or 104 °F (derates
relative humidity to ~54% at 50 °C or 122 °F)
Altitude
A- 10
Operating
3000 meters maximum.
Non-Operating
Up to 40,000 ft (12,190 m)
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix A: Specifications
Certification and Compliances
Table A- 10: Electromagnetic compatibility
Category
Standards or description
EC Declaration of Conformity - EMC
Meets the intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatibility.
Compliances were demonstrated using EN 61326:1997 EMC Product Family Standard for
Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory use.
Emissions1:
EN 61326
Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions
EN 61000-3-2(A14)Conducted Power Line Harmonic Current
1
2
3
4
Immunity1,2:
IEC 61000-4-2
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 61000-4-4
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity, Performance Criterion “B”
Radiated RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity3,4 Performance Criterion “A”
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity, Performance Criterion “B”
IEC 61000-4-5
Power Line Surge Immunity, Performance Criterion “B”
IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted RF Immunity3, Performance Criterion “A”
IEC 61000-4-11
Voltage Dips and Short Interruptions Immunity, Performance Criterion “B”
Australia Declaration of Conformity
Complies with EMC Framework and demonstrated per Emission standard:
AS/NZS 2064
Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment.
USA, FCC Compliance
Emissions comply with FCC Code of Federal Regulations 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
Limits.
Compliance demonstrated using high quality, shielded interface cables.
Minimum immunity test requirement, except where noted.
Performance Criterion: Product continues to operate properly and display remains readable.
Controlled EM environment requirement (1V/M).
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
A- 11
Appendix A: Specifications
Table A- 11: Environmental limits and use classification for safety certification compliance
Category
Standards or description
Safety Certification Compliance
Temperature, operating
+5 _C to +40 _C
Altitude (maximum operating)
3000 meters
Equipment Type
Test and measuring
Safety Class
Class 1 (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex H) - grounded product
Installation (Overvoltage)
Category
Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 61010-1, Annex J)
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 61010-1). Note: Rated for indoor use only.
Supply Voltage Range
100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, single phase
Fuse Rating
Mains fuse is 10A, 250 V, Fast; Not operator replaceable. Refer servicing to qualified service
personnel.
Current Rating
6.0 Amps maximum
Relative Humidity
(maximum operating)
80% for temperatures up to 31 °C, decreasing linearly to 50% at 40 °C
Pollution Degree Definition
European Union Compliance
A measure of the contaminates that could occur in the environment around and within a
product. Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the
external. Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.
Pollution Degree 1
No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Products
in this category are generally encapsulated, hermetically sealed, or
located in clean rooms.
Pollution Degree 2
Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs. Occasionally a
temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be
expected. This location is a typical office/home environment.
Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of
service.
Pollution Degree 3
Conductive pollution, or dry, nonconductive pollution that becomes
conductive due to condensation. These are sheltered locations
where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled. The area is
protected from direct sunshine, rain, or direct wind.
Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of
the European Union:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010-1/A2
Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement
Control and Laboratory Use.
Listing by a U.S. Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory
ANSI/ISA S82.01
Canadian Certification
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use.
A- 12
Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test, Measuring,
Controlling, and Related Equipment., 1994.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix A: Specifications
Table A- 11: Environmental limits and use classification for safety certification compliance (Cont.)
Category
Standards or description
Additional Compliance
UL3111-1
Standard for Electrical Measuring and Test Equipment.
IEC61010-1/A2
Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use.
Installation (Overvoltage) Category
Laser Classification
Terminals on this product may have different installation (overvoltage) category designations.
The installation categories are:
CAT III
Distribution-level mains (usually permanently connected). Equipment at this level is
typically in a fixed industrial location.
CAT II
Local-level mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level includes appliances, portable
tools, and similar products. Equipment is usually cord-connected.
CAT I
Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of electronic equipment.
This product contains a CD ROM drive which utilizes a Class 1 laser and complies with
EN60825-- 1:94, as well as with the U.S. FDA regulations. The drive is marked with the laser’s
classification and the date of manufacture, as well as the following information:
Complies with the DHHS rules 21 CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J applicable at the date of
manufacture.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
A- 13
Appendix A: Specifications
A- 14
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
This appendix gives you the following information:
H
What to do if an application locks
H
How to create and use an emergency repair disk
H
How to recover from a corrupted hard drive or install a new one
H
How to reload PQA300 system software
H
How to load video test sequences
If an Application Locks
As with all software, the application may lock up. In most cases the easiest way
to unlock the application is to use the Windows NT End Task utility as follows:
1. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to access the Windows NT Security dialog box.
2. Click the Task Manager command button to open the Windows NT Task
Manager dialog box.
3. Click the locked application.
4. Click the End Task command button.
5. If the preceding steps do not close the locked application, perform the
following:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Del to access the Windows NT Security dialog box.
b. Click on the Shutdown button to bring up the Shutdown dialog box.
c. Choose the Shutdown and Restart option button and then click OK. If
this does not end the application or shut down the unit, power the Server
down for a few minutes, and then proceed with a normal power on.
NOTE. It is not good practice to power down the server without first exiting
Windows NT. Use this method only if the server is not responsive.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 1
Appendix B: Software Repair
Creating and Using an Emergency Repair Disk
To minimize the chances that you will have to completely reload the operating
software for a minor problem, create an emergency repair disk for each PQA300
system. Update the emergency repair disk each time you upgrade software, add a
user, or change a password.
If your system files become corrupt, first try to recover the previous startup
configuration (Last Known Good — Windows NT startup screen option). If this
does not work, use the emergency repair disk to restore your system to the initial
setup state. If you don’t have an emergency repair disk, you must reinstall
Windows NT (refer to the Windows NT System Guide).
If user passwords are forgotten, use the emergency repair disk to restore them.
Creating an
Emergency Repair Disk
To create an emergency repair disk, mark a High Density 3.5-inch disk clearly as
the emergency repair disk for PQA300 system serial number B0xxxxx and then
perform the following steps:
1. Choose Run from the Windows NT Start menu.
2. Type rdisk in the Run dialog box. The Repair Disk Utility dialog box, as
shown below, opens.
3. Click Update Repair Info to save your current configuration. A message
appears to remind you that earlier repair information is overwritten. Click
Yes to continue.
4. When the process is complete, a message asks if you want to create an
Emergency Repair Disk. Click Yes. The message shown below appears.
B- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
5. Insert a 3.5-inch disk in drive A and click OK. The system formats the disk
and copies the configuration files onto it.
6. When the operation is complete, click Exit in the Repair Disk Utility dialog
box. Remove the disk from drive A and store it in a safe place.
Using an Emergency
Repair Disk
Always refer to the Windows NT documentation if you need more information.
1. Verify that you have a source of setup information available (the Windows NT back-up software).
2. Insert the Windows NT Setup disk.
3. Restart the PQA300 system.
4. When the Windows NT Setup Screen appears, press R (repair).
5. When prompted, insert the emergency repair disk.
6. The emergency repair disk performs the following:
H
Runs CHKDSK.EXE on the WINNT and SYSTEM partitions.
H
Verifies each file in the installation and replaces any that are missing or
corrupt.
H
Replaces the System, Security, and Security Accounts Manager structure
in the registry.
H
Reinstalls the Boot Loader (the boot sector, BOOT.INI, and so forth).
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 3
Appendix B: Software Repair
Recovering the Operating System / Partitioning a New or Corrupted Hard Drive
CAUTION. If you have a new or corrupted hard drive, you need to format the disk
(fdisk)by performing step 13. When you format the disk, all data on the hard
drive will be lost.
You may want to skip 13 (for example, if you do not have a new or corrupted
hard drive, but one of your system drivers is corrupted or Windows fails to boot).
If you skip step 13, data on drive C will be lost, but data on drive D will be
retained.
If your system files become corrupt, first try using the emergency repair disk as
described on page B--3. If that does not work, proceed with the following steps:
1. Turn on the PC. During startup, press the F2 key to enter Setup. The System
Configuration Summary will display.
2. Scroll down to F4 Boot Options Configuration Utility.
3. Press the Enter key to go to Boot Order.
4. Press the Arrow keys until #1 in the list is Removable Devices.
5. Repeat step 4 until:
#2 is ATAPI CD--ROM drive
#3 is Hard Drive
#4 is Network Boot
6. Press the Escape key.
7. Press the F10 key. The message reads: Exit Saving Changes.
8. Press the Enter key. A message regarding Setup Confirmation appears.
9. Insert the Recovery CD into the CD drive. Wait for the green light on the
drive to go off.
10. Press the Enter key to indicate Yes.
11. The system reboots from the Recovery CD.
12. The Readme.txt file is displayed. Press the Enter key as needed to advance to
the end of the text. The z:\ prompt appears. If you are only attempting to
recover the operating system, go to step 14 now. If you have a new or
corrupted hard drive, proceed with step 13.
B- 4
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
CAUTION. Perform step 13 only if you have a new or corrupted hard drive. If you
perform this step, all data on the hard drive will be lost. Before starting this
step, copy any data files that you want to save onto a floppy disk if possible.
13. Perform this step only if you have a new or corrupted hard drive.
a. Type fdisk/x at the prompt to begin partitioning the hard drive. The
system is in Extended Mode, as indicated in the upper right corner of the
screen. Existing partitions are displayed in a list.
b. Type a “2” to enter delete mode.
c. Type a “1” to indicate that you want to delete a primary partition.
d. Type a partition number from the list of partitions.
e. Repeat steps until all partitions are deleted (no more partitions are
listed).
f.
Press Escape to return to the main menu.
g. Type a “1” to indicate that you want to create a partition.
h. Type a “3” to indicated that you want a NON--DOS primary partition.
The display will indicate the cylinder numbers that will be used, as well
as the maximum partition size. A message regarding partition size is
displayed.
i.
Select Yes to use the maximum partition size.
j.
Type a “5” and press the Enter key for fat32.
k. Type a “1” to indicate that you want to create a partition.
l.
Type a “3” to indicated that you want a NON--DOS primary partition.
The display will indicate the cylinder numbers that will be used, as well
as the maximum partition size. A message regarding partition size is
displayed.
m. Select Yes to use the maximum partition size.
n. Type a “5” and press the Enter key for fat32.
o. Check to be sure that there are now two 2--GB partitions listed on the
display.
p. Press the Escape key. The message reads: “Strike any key to reboot.”
q. Press any key to reboot. When the reboot is successful, the message
reads: “BIOS Installed Successfully” and the Readme.txt file is
displayed.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 5
Appendix B: Software Repair
r. Press the Enter key as needed to advance to the end of the text. The
z:\ prompt appears.
14. At the z:\ prompt, type restbv14 to restore the system BIOS and press the
Enter key.
15. Type Cd \ to return to the z:\ prompt. Type restsys to restore the Windows
NT operating system and press the Enter key. The License.txt file is
displayed.
16. Press the Enter key as needed to advance to the end of the text and then press
the Enter key again until the Recovery application starts. The PQA300
Picture Quality Analysis System installation screen appears.
17. Use the mouse to select Continue. Select Yes in the dialog box to start
installing the Windows NT operating system. During installation, you may
see a message that the drive is not bootable. Ignore the message and select
OK. After installation is complete, the Reboot.txt file is displayed.
18. Remove the OS Recovery CD from the CD--ROM as instructed by the
displayed message.
19. At the z:\ prompt, type CTL + ALT, DEL to reboot from the hard drive into
the Windows NT operating system.
20. If you skipped step 13 (fdisk), go to step 37 now. If you performed step 13,
proceed with step 21 and complete the remainder of the steps.
B- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
21. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, Administrative tools, Disk
Administrator. Informational Disk Administrator messages will display.
Select OK for all of these messages. The Disk Administrator configuration
box displays. It should look similar to the following illustration:
22. Right click the Unknown partition in the display and select Delete. A
message indicates that all data will be lost.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 7
Appendix B: Software Repair
23. Select Yes to proceed. The Unknown space combines with the Free space.
The configuration box should look similar to the following illustration:
24. Right click the Free space on the display and select Create. A message
indicates that you will create a NON--DOS partition.
25. Select Yes. The Create Primary Partition dialog box appears.
26. Select the maximum partition size (default) and click OK. A Confirmation
box appears.
B- 8
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
27. Select Yes. Drive D now shows as Unformatted, similar to the following
illustration.
28. Right click on the Unformatted partition.
29. From the drop--down menu, select Commit Changes Now. A Confirmation
box appears.
30. Select Yes. You should see a message that the disks were updated successfully. Select OK.
31. Right click on the Unformatted partition.
32. From the drop--down menu, select Format. In the Format dialog box under
File System, select NTFS and Quick Format.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 9
Appendix B: Software Repair
33. Select Start. See the following illustration. A warning indicates that data will
be erased.
34. Select OK. A message indicates that the format is complete.
B- 10
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
35. Select OK and close the Format dialog box. Now the drive is formatted for
the NTFS file system. The display should look similar to the following
illustration.
36. Close the Disk Administrator.
37. Now you have restored the operating software. Proceed with installing the
application software and sequences as described in the remainder of this
section.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 11
Appendix B: Software Repair
Reinstalling the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System Software
If your PQA300 system software is accidently deleted or becomes corrupted, use
the following procedures to reinstall the software. The application software is
supplied on CD-ROM.
NOTE. The following procedures are only for reinstalling the PQA300 system
application software on a machine running Windows NT Workstation 4.0; if you
are installing a software upgrade, follow the instructions provided with the
upgrade kit.
Installing the PQA300
Application Program
To install the software, place the PQA300 application software CD in the CD
drive. The system reads the CD and displays the Install Wizard.
Installing the Generator
and Reference Sequences
The test sequences are supplied on CD in Header Only and Header Plus
generator sequences. The reference sequences are extracted from the generator
sequences in the installation process. During installation, you select which
generator sequences and reference you want to install.
1. Place the CD containing the sequences you want to install in the CD drive.
The system reads the CD and displays the Install Wizard as shown in the
following illustration.
2. Close any programs you have running and click Next to continue.
B- 12
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
PQA300 Sequence Setup
Welcome to the PQA300 Sequence Setup program.
3. The second window (see below) shows the location in which the files you
select later will be saved. The default location is the directory where the
application was installed. If that selection works for your system, click Next
and skip to step 6.
PQA300 Sequence Setup
PQA300
D:\PQA300
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 13
Appendix B: Software Repair
4. To change the destination folder, click on the Browse soft key to display the
Choose Folder menu shown below.
c:\Projects\PQA300
c:\
Projects
PQA300
5. After you choose the new destination folder, click the OK button to accept
the change and exit the menu.
6. Click the Next button to continue.
7. The next window (shown on the next page) is the selection window for
choosing the test sequence or sequences you want to store on the hard drive.
Click the check box to select a test sequence for installation. All of the
sub-components of the selected test sequence (generator, generator plus,
reference, and reference plus) are selected for installation.
NOTE. The selections available by selecting the Change soft key apply only to the
highlighted test sequence name. If you want to make selections for another
sequence, highlight the sequence name before you click the Change soft key.
B- 14
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix B: Software Repair
8. If you do not want to install all of the sub-components of a test sequence,
click the Change soft key. If you want to store all of the sub-components, go
to step 11.
9. Click the check boxes to deselect any part of the test sequence you do not
want to install. If you deselect them all, the main test sequence selection is
automatically deselected.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
B- 15
Appendix B: Software Repair
10. Click the Continue soft key to continue.
11. The system displays the amount of disk space needed to store the selected
test sequence components and the amount of space available. If there is not
enough disk storage space available, an error message will appear. To
increase available disk space, delete unneeded generator and reference
sequences using the Windows NT file manager or the PQA300 system file
operations menu. Generator video sequences are about 102 Mbytes each, and
reference video sequences are about 42 Mbytes each.
12. Click Next. This displays a list of all the files you have selected for
installation. To modify the selection list, go back to step 9. If the list is
correct, click the Continue soft key to install the files.
The generator and reference files you selected are automatically stored in the
correct folders in the PQA300 directory (generator and reference respectively).
B- 16
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
This section provides a functional check of the analyzer and generator DSP
(digital signal processor) modules, followed by a functional check of the Option
01 encoder and decoder modules.
The check for the analyzer and generator modules makes PQR and PSNR picture
quality measurements on unimpaired and impaired video test sequences, checks
that the active loop-through outputs pass a signal correctly, and checks that the
serial 601 output of the analyzer DSP displays correctly on an external 601 serial
digital video monitor.
A supplied test video sequence is used as the reference to verify the serial digital
operation of the system, and then an impaired test sequence is captured as the
test video sequence to verify the measurement algorithms. In each of the tests,
you check the measurement results against the expected values to verify the
functionality of analyzer and generator DSP modules.
Equipment Required
Table C--1 lists the test equipment required for the functional check procedure.
The table gives examples and minimum requirements where applicable. The
equipment you use must meet or exceed the requirements listed in Table C--1.
Table C- 1: Required equipment list
Test equipment
Minimum requirements
Example
Digital video monitor
Receives and displays serial digital
video signals in ITU-- R BT.601
format
Sony video monitor with
serial digital interface,
BVM-- 14F5U
75 Ω coaxial cables (2)
Low-loss video cable, double
shielded; BNC male to BNC male
72 in.
Tektronix part number
012-0159-01
75 Ω coaxial cable
BNC male to SMB female, test
equipment interconnection, 39.5 in.
Tektronix part number
174-3579-00
75 Ω terminations (2)
BNC termination, 75 Ω for termina- Tektronix part number
tion of unused passive loop-through 011-0102-03
outputs on the encoder and decoder
modules
75 Ω coaxial adapter cable (2) BNC male to SMB female, 9 in.
Option 01 interconnections
Tektronix part number
174-3916-00
75 Ω coaxial adapter cable
Tektronix part number
174-3915-00
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
SMB female to SMB female, 8 in.
Option 01 interconnection
C- 1
Appendix C: Functional Check
Table C- 1: Required equipment list (cont.)
Test equipment
Minimum requirements
Example
S-- Video signal cable
Standard S-Video cable, 72 in., 4
pin DIN connectors on both ends
Tektronix part number
012-1554-00
Impaired Video Test Sequence Video test sequence with known
CD
impairments
Tektronix part number
063-3025-00
Procedure
1. Press the On/Stby switch to power on the instrument.
2. Allow the PQA300 system to go through the Windows NT initialization
process. If the system fails to boot up correctly, refer the problem to a
qualified service person.
3. When the PQA300 application starts, click on the X in the upper right corner
of the PQA300 application window to stop the PQA300 application. If
autologin is disabled, use the key sequence CTRL + ALT + Delete to display
the login dialog box.
4. Log in as Administrator and use PQA300 as the password. Click OK. If the
default Administrator Username and Password have been changed, use the
current valid Username and Password.
Load the Impaired Test
Sequences
The following procedure loads the impaired video test sequences that are used
for testing the system.
NOTE. To shorten the verification procedure, load only the reference and
generate video sequences of the format that you expect to use most (601-625 or
601-525). The following procedure uses the Mobile3mbs+ impaired video test
sequence to run the first impaired video measurement. If you want to test all of
the impaired video sequences, load them all now.
1. Place the impaired video test sequence CD-ROM disc in the CD drive. As
soon as the disc is recognized, an Install Wizard is initiated to assist you in
loading the test sequences. (Refer to Installing the Generator and Reference
Sequences on page B--12 for the procedure for installing files from the disc.)
2. Load the three impaired video test sequences (Mobile+.601-525 or Mobile+.601-625 as needed for your system) from the Impaired Video Test
Sequence CD-ROM to the hard disk drive.
C- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
Set Up the PQA300
System for Serial
Digital Testing
The following procedure sets up the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System to
generate a test sequence, capture that same test sequence, measure the captured
test sequence against the stored reference sequence, and display the measurement
results.
1. Connect the Generator 601 Out (BNC connector) to the Analyzer Channel A
In (BNC connector) using a 75 Ω coaxial cable as shown in Figure C--1.
Analyzer Generator
module
module
Ch A out
Ch A in
1
2
To 601 digital
video monitor
3
SVGA video
module
4
5
6
7
601 Out
8
9
10
11
12
To SVGA
monitor
Figure C- 1: Initial connections for the functional check
2. Double click on the PQA300 icon to start the application.
3. Use the BNC-to-BNC coaxial cable to connect the Channel A Loop Through
Out BNC connector of the analyzer to the serial digital input of the external
digital video monitor.
4. Set up the video monitor to view the serial digital input.
5. Right click the Preference soft key to display the Preference Configuration
menu.
6. Click the down arrow in the Startup Presets name field and select the factory
preset.
7. Click OK to accept the change and exit the menu.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 3
Appendix C: Functional Check
8. Click the Preference soft key to restore the factory configuration settings.
9. Right click the Generate soft key to display the Generate Configuration
menu.
10. Select the correct signal type (601-525 or 601-625).
11. Select to generate the Mobile+ sequence.
12. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the menu.
13. Right click the Capture soft key to display the Capture Configuration menu.
14. Select the correct signal type (601-525 or 601-625). This selection must be
the same signal type as the sequence you selected to generate for the test.
15. Select Mobile+ as the reference or use the factory default, Any valid
sequence.
NOTE. The stored reference sequence names are available for selection. You may
select Any valid sequence as a capture choice, but if the captured sequence does
not have a matching reference sequence stored in the reference directory, you get
an error message when you try to measure it. You can add the matching
reference to the hard disk later and select the sequence to be measured. When
you start the measurement again, the matching reference file is found and the
measurements you have selected are done.
16. Either give the test an alias name or leave the test name edit field blank. If
left blank, a default file name is given to the captured sequence when it is
saved.
17. Click the OK button to accept the changes and exit the menu.
18. Right click the Measure soft key to display the Measure Configuration
menu. The captured sequence is the default choice to measure.
19. Select PQR Luma, PQR Luma & Chroma, and PSNR Luma in the Picture
Quality Measurement box.
20. Click the OK button to accept the changes and exit the menu.
Unimpaired
Sequence Test
1. Click the Generate soft key to start generating the Mobile+ test sequence.
2. Click the Capture soft key to start the capture operation.
3. Check that the test sequence is displayed on the external serial digital
monitor to verify the Channel A Out active loop through.
C- 4
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
4. Wait for the test sequence to be captured. The message “Captured sequence
saved” with the name, format, and file extension is displayed when the
capture is done. Note the time stamp of the sequence just stored for future
reference. If you have several sequences of the same name, only the time
stamp distinguishes one from another.
5. Click the Measure soft key to start the measurement.
You should see the PQR map of each field as it is being processed. The
progress indicator and the messages in the status bar show you what is
happening along with the field number that is being processed.
After the PQR analysis finishes, the PSNR measurement is started. The
PSNR map of each field is also displayed as the measurements are made.
When the measurements have completed, the Summary results are displayed.
6. Check the Summary results for the correct measurement values for the
unimpaired video test sequence.
PQR Luma
PQR Luma & Chroma
PSNR Luma
0.00
0.00
Infinite
7. Click the soft key at the bottom right of the soft key menu selections (now
labeled Summary). The label changes to Details, and Details table is
displayed.
8. Check that the Details results PQR fields are all 0.00 and the PSNR fields
are all INFINITE.
9. Click the soft key at the bottom right of the soft key menu selections (now
labeled Details). The label changes to Graph, and the results graph is
displayed.
10. Check the PSNR graph for a row of Xs at the bottom of the graph (X
signifies infinite).
11. In the Legend box, select the PQR graph. Check the PQR graph results for a
straight horizontal line graph at 0.
12. Select the PQR YC graph. Check the PQR graph results for a straight
horizontal line graph at 0.
If PSNR and PQR values are correct, the generate, capture, measure, and results
display functions of the DSP modules are verified for the unimpaired video
sequences.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 5
Appendix C: Functional Check
Impaired Sequence Test
After you have confirmed that the unimpaired video test is correct, use the
following procedure to test one or more of the impaired video sequences.
Measuring the impaired test sequence against the stored reference sequence
provides a check on the operation of the measurement algorithm with different
levels of impairment in the video material.
1. In the Generate Configuration menu, select one of the impaired video test
sequences (for example, Mobile3mbs+).
2. In the Capture Configuration menu, select the correct signal type (601-525 or
601-625).
3. Select the Mobile+ reference sequence. This reference matches the name in
the header ID for all the Mobile+ impaired video test sequences.
4. Click the Generate soft key to start generating the impaired test sequence.
5. Click the Capture soft key to start the capture operation.
6. Wait for the test sequence to be captured. The message “Capture sequence
saved” with the name, format, and file extension is displayed when the
capture is done. Note the time stamp of the sequence just saved for future
reference. If you have several sequences of the same name, only the time
stamp distinguishes one from another.
7. Click on the Measure soft key to start the measurement. The progress
indicator and the messages in the status bar show you what is happening.
Features that become unavailable during a measure are grayed out. When all
the measurements have completed, the Summary results are displayed.
8. Check the Summary results for the correct measurement values for the
captured impaired video test sequence against the values given either in
Table C--2 or in Table C--3, as appropriate. The values given in the tables
after the PQR and PSNR numbers are the detected parameter values. The
parameter values, especially the levels, are typical and can vary as the
algorithm is adjusted.
The PQR and PSNR values you measure should be very close to the values
given in the tables. If the PQR and PSNR values are correct, the measure
algorithms are verified.
9. If there is a significant difference between the measured PQR values or the
PSNR values for an impaired sequence and the values given in the table for
that sequence, recheck your configuration and redo the test. If the problem
persists, refer it to a qualified service person.
C- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
Table C- 2: Mobile+.601-525 impaired video test sequence results and correction
values
Mobile at 3 MB/s
Mobile at 6 MB/s
Mobile at 9 MB/s
PQR Luma
8.10
PQR Luma
5.40
PQR Luma
4.20
PQR Luma &
Chroma
8.50
PQR Luma &
Chroma
5.70
PQR Luma &
Chroma
4.40
PSNR Luma
24.00
PSNR Luma
27.20
PSNR Luma
29.50
Y-XShift
0.006
Y-XShift
- 0.006
Y-XShift
0.000
Cb-- XShift
- 0.006
Cb-- XShift
0.001
Cb-- XShift
0.002
Cr-- XShift
0.003
Cr-- XShift
- 0.005
Cr-- XShift
- 0.002
Y-YShift
0.000
Y-YShift
0.000
Y-YShift
0.000
Cb-YShift
0.000
Cb-YShift
0.000
Cb-YShift
0.000
Cb-YShift
0.000
Cr-YShift
0.000
Cr-YShift
0.000
Left Crop
8
Left Crop
8
Left Crop
8
Top Crop
4
Top Crop
4
Top Crop
4
Right Crop
8
Right Crop
8
Right Crop
8
Bottom Crop
4
Bottom Crop
4
Bottom Crop
4
Y-Level
1.606
Y-Level
0.782
Y-Level
0.134
Cb-Level
0.089
Cb-Level
0.087
Cb-Level
0.058
Cr-Level
- 0.436
Cr-Level
- 0.045
Cr-Level
0.429
Y-Gain
0.978
Y-Gain
0.993
Y-Gain
0.999
Cb-Gain
0.986
Cb-Gain
0.992
Cb-Gain
0.992
Cr-Gain
0.992
Cr-Gain
1.000
Cr-Gain
0.995
Table C- 3: Mobile+.601-625 impaired video test sequence results
Mobile at 3 MB/s
Mobile at 6 MB/s
Mobile at 9 MB/s
PQR Luma
7.80
PQR Luma
5.30
PQR Luma
4.20
PQR Luma &
Chroma
8.20
PQR Luma &
Chroma
5.60
PQR Luma &
Chroma
4.40
PSNR Luma
24.90
PSNR Luma
28.30
PSNR Luma
30.60
Y-XShift
0.001
Y-XShift
- 0.005
Y-XShift
0.001
Cb-- XShift
- 0.004
Cb-- XShift
0.001
Cb-XShift
0.001
Cr-- XShift
- 0.005
Cr-- XShift
0.002
Cr-XShift
0.000
Y-YShift
0.000
Y-YShift
0.000
Y-YShift
0.000
Cb-YShift
0.000
Cb-YShift
0.000
Cb-YShift
0.000
Cr-YShift
0.000
Cr-YShift
0.000
Cr-YShift
0.000
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 7
Appendix C: Functional Check
Table C- 3: Mobile+.601-625 impaired video test sequence results (cont.)
Mobile at 3 MB/s
Mobile at 6 MB/s
Mobile at 9 MB/s
Left Crop
8
Left Crop
8
Left Crop
8
Top Crop
0
Top Crop
0
Top Crop
0
Right Crop
8
Right Crop
8
Right Crop
8
Bottom Crop
0
Bottom Crop
0
Bottom Crop
0
Y-Level
0.085
Y-Level
- 0.036
Y-Level
- 0.116
Cb-Level
0.296
Cb-Level
0.119
Cb-Level
- 0.011
Cr-Level
- 0.455
Cr-Level
0.180
Cr-Level
0.111
Y-Gain
1.000
Y-Gain
0.999
Y-Gain
1.000
Cb-Gain
0.972
Cb-Gain
0.998
Cb-Gain
0.992
Cr-Gain
0.994
Cr-Gain
0.998
Cr-Gain
0.999
10. If you want additional verification of the measure algorithm, you can repeat
the impaired video sequence test using another of the impaired video test
sequences. The expected test results for the impaired video sequences are
given either in Table C--2 or in Table C--3, as appropriate for the video
format.
Check Analyzer DSP
601 Out Signal
The following procedure checks that the 601 Out connector provides a serial
digital signal to the external serial digital monitor.
1. Disconnect the Channel A loop-through out connection to the external digital
monitor. You can also disconnect the generator 601 output from the analyzer
Channel A In connector.
2. Connect the analyzer module 601 Out signal to the external monitor serial
digital input connector as shown in Figure C--2.
3. Right click the 601 Display soft key to display the External 601 Display
Configuration menu.
4. Select Sequence as source of the video test sequence.
5. Select Mobile+ as the sequence to playback.
6. Check that Forward and Continuous are enabled.
7. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the menu.
8. Click on the 601 Display soft key to start the external video display of the
Mobile+ signal.
C- 8
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
9. After the sequence data is loaded from the hard drive, the analyzer outputs
the sequence. Check that the video display on the external digital component
video monitor is correct.
10. Disconnect the cable going to digital component video monitor from the
analyzer Channel A Out BNC connector.
Analyzer Generator
module
module
SVGA video
module
Ch A in
1
2
To 601 digital
video monitor
3
601 Out
4
5
6
7
601 Out
8
9
10
11
12
To SVGA
monitor
Figure C- 2: Connection for analyzer 601 Out check
Check Generator Channel
A Loop Through
1. Connect the cable going to the digital component video monitor to the
generator Channel A Out BNC connector as shown in Figure C--3.
2. Connect the analyzer 601 Out BNC connector to the generator Channel A In
BNC connector using a 75 Ω coaxial cable.
3. Right click the 601 Display soft key to display the External 601 Playback
Configuration menu.
4. Select the Mobile+ sequence in 601-525 or 601-625 as appropriate to play
back to the 601 out connector.
5. Check that the playback is set for Continuous Looping.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the menu.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 9
Appendix C: Functional Check
7. Click the 601 Display soft key to start the play back.
8. Check that the video display on the external digital component video
monitor is correct.
9. This ends the functional verification procedure for the analyzer and generator
BNC connections. Disconnect the cables and test equipment.
Analyzer Generator
module
module
SVGA video
module
Ch A In
Ch A Out
1
2
601 Out
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To 601 digital
video monitor
10
11
12
To SVGA
monitor
Figure C- 3: Connections for the generator Channel A Out loop-through check
C- 10
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
Analyzer and Generator
Channel B Out Loop
Through Connectors
The SMB Channel B In and Channel B Out connectors on the analyzer and
generator are used for making connections to the Option 01 encoder and decoder
modules. You can check the Channel B In and Channel B Out loop-through
connectors for both the analyzer and the generator is the same manner as done
for the Channel A In and Channel A Out loop connectors. You need two
BNC-to-SMB adapter cables to make the signal connections. This procedure
requires the same generator configuration as used for the serial digital testing
(refer to Set Up the PQA300 System for Serial Digital Testing on page C--3).
1. Connect the generator 601 Out connector to the analyzer Channel B In SMB
connector to supply an input signal.
2. Connect the analyzer Channel B Out connector to the external serial digital
video monitor. Click on Generate.
3. Check that the Channel B Out signal is displayed correctly on the serial
digital video monitor.
4. Use the analyzer 601 Out connector to supply an input signal to the
generator Channel B In, and check the generator Channel B Out signal using
the same procedure given in step 1 through step 3. Click on 601 Display.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 11
Appendix C: Functional Check
Option 1 Functional Verification
Functional verification of the Option 01 encoder and decoder modules consists
of running the encoder and decoder user diagnostics, and then making PQR and
PSNR picture quality measurements on unimpaired and impaired video test
sequences.
The measurements are first made using a supplied test video sequence as the
reference to verify the overall system. That same test video sequence is also
captured as a new testing reference, and the measurements are redone using the
new reference sequence. The second test eliminates the artifacts introduced by
the encoder and decoder from the picture quality measurement and verifies
capturing the correct color phase of the test video sequence. Finally, the test is
done using an impaired test sequence as the test video sequence to capture.
In each of the tests, you check the measurement results against the expected
values to verify the functionality of the encoder and decoder modules. The
following procedure requires the PQA300 system to be running, and have passed
the serial digital functional check.
Run Encoder and
Decoder Diagnostics
1. Click the Other soft key to display the selection menu. Click on Hardware
Settings and Diags to display the Hardware Settings menu shown below.
2. A message informs you that all the PQA300 applications must be stopped to
continue. Continue with the hardware setup.
C- 12
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
3. Click on the Enc--Dec Diags soft key to display the Encoder and Decoder
Diagnostics menu shown below. The diagnostic tests for each module are
separately selectable.
4. Click the Decoder diagnostics selection.
As the tests run, the test names are displayed in the Results box with the pass
or fail result of the test. Use the scroll bar to view the completed test results.
5. Click the Encoder diagnostics selection.
6. All the diagnostic tests should show a pass result.
If the encoder fails any of the tests, perform the Encoder Auto-Cal and rerun
the Encoder diagnostics.
a. Allow the PQA300 system to completely warm up (about 20 minutes)
before the using the automatic calibration feature. This permits all the
circuitry to stabilize so that the auto-cal adjustments are optimized for
the normal operating temperature.
b. Click the Encoder Auto-Cal selection.
c. After the auto calibration has finished, rerun the Encoder Diagnostics to
check for pass or fail of the diagnostic tests.
7. If the decoder shows diagnostic failures or if the encoder still shows
diagnostic failures after the auto calibration, refer your PQA300 system to a
qualified service person for repairs.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 13
Appendix C: Functional Check
Set Up the PQA300
System for Composite
Video Testing
The following procedure sets up the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System to
generate an analog video test sequence, capture that same test sequence, measure
the captured test sequence against the stored reference sequence, and display the
measurement results. The encoder to generator DSP and decoder to analyzer
DSP interconnection cables are standard accessories for Option 01. The cable
connections are shown in Figure C--4.
1. Connect the Generator 601 Out BNC connector to the encoder 601 In SMB
connector using the 75 Ω coaxial interconnection cable provided.
2. Do not connect the encoder Serial Black Out connector to the generator DSP
Channel B In connector. If it is connected, disconnect it. Genlock (synchronizing the encoder to the generator) is derived from the serial digital video
signal from the generator DSP.
3. Connect the decoder 601 Out SMB connector to the analyzer DSP Channel B In SMB connector using one of the provided 75 Ω coaxial cables.
4. Use the BNC-to-BNC coaxial cable to connect the encoder Composite Out
BNC connector to the decoder Composite loop-through input.
Decoder
Analyzer Generator
DSP
DSP
Encoder
Ch B
In
Video
Ch B
In
601
Out
601
Out
1
601 In
2
3
Composite Ch B out 601 Out to
in from
601 digital
encoder
video monitor
4
Serial
black out
5
6
7
8
Composite
out to
decoder
9
10
11
12
To SVGA
monitor
Figure C- 4: Connections for the encoder and decoder functional check
C- 14
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
5. Terminate the decoder Composite loop-through connector using a 75 Ω BNC
termination.
6. Use a BNC-to-SMB adapter coaxial cable to connect the analyzer Channel B
Out SMB connector to the 601 serial digital video monitor.
7. Set up the video monitor to view the serial digital input.
8. Double click on the PQA300 icon to start the application.
9. Right click the Preference soft key to display the Preference Configuration
menu.
10. Click the down arrow in the Startup Presets name field.
11. Click on the factory preset to select it.
12. Click OK to accept the change and exit the menu.
13. Click the Preference soft key to restore the factory configuration settings.
14. Right click the Generate soft key.
15. Select the correct signal type for the test (NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL).
Do the first functional verification test using the format that you expect to
use most or exclusively. You can elect to test for each of the signal types for
a more thorough functional check.
16. Select to generate the Mobile+ sequence.
17. Click OK in the Generate Configuration menu to accept the changes and exit
the menu.
18. Right click on the Capture soft key to display the Capture Configuration
menu.
19. Select the correct signal type for the test (NTSC, NTSC No Setup, or PAL).
20. Select Mobile+ as the reference sequence.
21. Set Capture As to Test.
22. Give the capture test an alias file name you can remember as you do the
verification tests. For example, call the reference captured for NTSC
“Mobile NTSC Test” and a reference captured for PAL “Mobile PAL Test”.
23. Click OK in the Capture Configuration menu to accept the changes and exit
the menu.
24. Right click on the Measure soft key. When a new test is captured it is the
default choice to measure.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 15
Appendix C: Functional Check
25. Select PQR Luma, PQR Luma & Chroma, and PSNR Luma in the Picture
Quality Measurement box.
26. Click the OK button to accept the changes and exit the menu.
Composite Sequence
Test Using a 601 Ref
1. Click the Generate soft key to start generating the Mobile+ test sequence.
2. Right click the Playback soft key to display the Playback Configuration
menu.
3. Select Live as the choice to play back. Select the video format you have
selected to capture in the Capture Configuration menu. Select NTSC.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the menu.
5. Click the Playback soft key to start the playback. The display is black until
the generator starts the test sequence.
6. Click on the Capture soft key to start the capture operation.
7. Wait for the test sequence to be captured. The captured reference name,
format, and file extension are displayed when the capture is done.
8. Click the Measure soft key to start the measurement. The captured test
sequence is compared against the Mobile+ 601 reference, and the encoder
and decoder effects are included in the measurements.
The PQR map of each field is displayed as it is being processed. The
progress indicator and the messages in the status bar show you what is
happening and the field number that is being processed.
After the PQR analysis finishes, the PSNR measurement starts. The PSNR
map of each field is also displayed as the measurements are made. When the
measurements have completed, the Summary results are displayed.
9. Check the Summary results against the typical values given for the unimpaired video test sequence in Table C--4. The values you get for the PQR and
PSNR numbers can be different, but should be about the same.
Table C- 4: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired sequence compared to
a 601 digital reference sequence
C- 16
Test
NTSC and NTSC no setup
PAL
PQR Luma
5.30
8.30
PQR Luma & Chroma
5.70
8.60
PSNR Luma
27.00
26.00
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
Composite Sequence
Test Using a
De-embedded Ref
1. Right click on the Capture soft key to redisplay the Capture Configuration
menu.
2. Select to capture as a reference. Mobile+ should still be the Reference
Sequence selected.
3. Give the reference capture an alias name that helps you remember the correct
capture and reference to associate it with. For example, NTSC Notch Mobile
Ref or PAL Notch Mobile Ref.
4. Click the Decoder soft key.
5. Select Notch processing.
6. Click OK button to accept the changes and go to the Capture Configuration
menu.
7. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the menu.
8. Click the Capture soft key to capture of the test video sequence as a
reference.
9. Wait for the capture and store to finish.
10. When the status bar indicates that the captured sequence is stored, right click
the Capture soft key to redisplay the Capture Configuration menu.
11. In the Reference Sequence field, select the alias name of the reference
sequence you captured in step 8 (NTSC Notch Mobile Ref or PAL Notch
Mobile Ref).
12. Select to capture as a test.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 17
Appendix C: Functional Check
13. Give the test capture an alias name that helps you remember the correct
capture and reference to associate it with. For example, NTSC Notch Mobile
Test or PAL Notch Mobile Test.
14. Click OK to accept the changes and exit the menu.
15. Click the Capture soft key to capture the Mobile+ sequence as a test.
16. Click the Measure soft key to start the measurements. The picture quality is
analyzed with respect to the captured reference. The effects of the encoder
and decoder modules are eliminated (de--embedded) from the analysis.
17. Check the Summary results against the typical values for the unimpaired
video test sequence given in Table C--5. The values you get for the PQR and
PSNR numbers can be different, but should be about the same.
Table C- 5: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired sequence compared to
a captured composite reference using Notch processing
Composite Impaired
Sequence Test
Test
NTSC and NTSC no setup
PAL
PQR Luma
0.90
1.40
PQR Luma & Chroma
0.90
1.40
PSNR Luma
48.00
45.00
When the unimpaired composite video test is correct, use the following
procedure to test impaired video sequences. Measuring an impaired test sequence
against the stored reference sequence checks the operation of encoder and
decoder modules with different levels of impairment in the video material.
1. In the Generate Configuration menu, select one of the impaired video test
sequences (for example, Mobile3mbs+).
2. In the Capture Configuration menu, select the correct signal type for the test
(NTSC, NTSC No Set Up, or PAL).
3. Select Mobile+ as the reference sequence.
4. Set Capture As to Test. Give the test capture a meaningful alias name so you
can identify it in a list of captured files. That name is also displayed on the
results displays to identify the results.
5. Click on the Decoder soft key.
6. Select Adaptive Line processing. Adaptive Line should be used in most
cases when testing against the 601 digital reference.
7. Click OK to accept the changes and go to the Capture Configuration menu.
C- 18
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
8. Click OK again to exit the Capture Configuration menu.
9. Click on the Generate soft key to start generating the test sequence.
10. Click on the Capture soft key to start the capture operation.
11. Wait for the test sequence to be captured. The message “Capture sequence
saved” with the name, format, and file extension is displayed when the
capture is done.
12. Click on the Measure soft key to start the measurement. The progress
indicator and the messages in the status bar at the bottom of the PQA300
display show you what is happening. When all the measurements have
completed, the Summary results are displayed.
13. Check the Summary results for the correct measurement values for the
captured impaired video test sequence compared to the typical values given
either in Table C--6 or in Table C--7, as appropriate. Note that the NTSC and
NTSC No Setup sequences are given as the same number. There are some
minor differences between the two sequence types, but no more than the
expected tolerance for either type.
The PQR and PSNR values you measure can be different than the typical
values given in the tables, but they should be about the same. If the PQR and
PSNR values are correct, the measure algorithms are verified.
14. If there is a significant difference between the PQR Luma value or the PSNR
Luma values for an impaired sequence and the values given in the table for
that sequence, check your setup again and redo the test. If the problem
persists, refer the PQA300 system to a qualified service person.
15. For additional verification of the measure algorithm, repeat the impaired
video sequence test using another of the impaired video test sequences.
Table C- 6: Mobile+ NTSC and NTSC No Setup impaired video test sequence
results for composite video
Mobile at 3 MB/s
Mobile at 6 MB/s
Mobile at 9 MB/s
PQR Luma
9.00
PQR Luma
7.00
PQR Luma
6.30
PQR Luma &
Chroma
9.50
PQR Luma &
Chroma
7.5
PQR Luma &
Chroma
6.75
PSNR Luma
23.00
PSNR Luma
25.00
PSNR Luma
25.70
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 19
Appendix C: Functional Check
Table C- 7: Mobile+ PAL impaired video test sequence results for composite
video
Mobile at 3 MB/s
S-Video Verification
Mobile at 6 MB/s
Mobile at 9 MB/s
PQR Luma
10.20
PQR Luma
9.00
PQR Luma
8.60
PQR Luma &
Chroma
PQR Luma &
Chroma
9.50
PQR Luma &
Chroma
9.00
10.80
PSNR Luma
23.30
PSNR Luma
24.50
PSNR Luma
25.00
You can check the S-Video functionality if you have an S-Video interconnection
cable. The following procedure assumes that the composite video testing for
Option 01 passed, and that the configuration settings are as made for those tests.
Make the following changes to test the S-Video operation:
1. Connect the encoder S-Video output to the decoder S-Video input.
2. In the Capture Configuration menu, click on the Decoder button to display
the Decoder Configuration menu.
3. Select S-Video as the input selection and Simple as the processing selection.
(Simple is the only available selection for PAL video format.)
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit to the Capture Configuration menu.
5. Click OK in the Capture Configuration menu to exit the menu.
6. Rerun both composite unimpaired sequence tests (601-ref and de-embedded)
starting on page C--16 and the composite impaired sequence test starting on
C- 20
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix C: Functional Check
page C--18. You have to recapture a new reference to eliminate (de-embed)
the effects of the encoder and decoder. The measurement values for the
unimpaired S-Video tested against the 601 serial digital reference are shown
in Table C--8. The measurement values for the unimpaired S-Video tested
against a captured S-Video reference that de-embeds the encoder and decoder
effects are shown in Table C--9.
Table C- 8: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired sequence against 601
serial digital reference
Test
NTSC and NTSC no setup
PAL
PQR Luma
2.10
2.20
PQR Luma & Chroma
2.30
2.40
PSNR Luma
47.60
43.50
The testing results for S-Video shown in Table C--8 are better than the same tests
made on the composite video reference. S-Video has its luminance and chrominance already separated, and the encoder and decoder processing is less of a
factor on the measurement values obtained. Notice that the results shown in
Table C--9, obtained using the de-embedding technique, are similar to the results
of the composite video tests shown in Table C--5.
Table C- 9: Summary picture quality values for unimpaired sequence against
captured S-Video reference using Simple processing
Test
NTSC and NTSC no setup
PAL
PQR Luma
0.90
0.95
PQR Luma & Chroma
0.90
0.95
PSNR Luma
49.20
49.15
7. Verify the measured results for the unimpaired video sequence and the
impaired video sequence against the typical expected results shown in Table
C--10 or Table C--11, as appropriate for the video format of the test.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
C- 21
Appendix C: Functional Check
Table C- 10: Mobile+ NTSC and NTSC No Setup impaired video test sequence
results for S-Video
Mobile at 3 MB/s
Mobile at 6 MB/s
Mobile at 9 MB/s
PQR Luma
8.10
PQR Luma
5.50
PQR Luma
4.40
PQR Luma &
Chroma
PQR Luma &
Chroma
5.80
8.60
PQR Luma &
Chroma
4.70
PSNR Luma
24.00
PSNR Luma
27.20
PSNR Luma
29.40
Table C- 11: Mobile+ PAL impaired video test sequence results for S-Video
Mobile at 3 MB/s
Format Verification
C- 22
Mobile at 6 MB/s
Mobile at 9 MB/s
PQR Luma
8.00
PQR Luma
5.60
PQR Luma
4.50
PQR Luma &
Chroma
PQR Luma &
Chroma
5.90
8.35
PQR Luma &
Chroma
4.90
PSNR Luma
24.90
PSNR Luma
28.30
PSNR Luma
30.50
The functionality is verified using only one format, preferably the one you use
for the majority of your testing. If you choose, you can redo all the tests in each
of the video formats to verify the operation. In each step of the tests, select a
different format than you used for the original testing. For example, if you used
PAL format for the first test, select NTSC or NTSC No Setup. The expected
measurement results for the impaired sequence testing are provided for each
level of impairment of the provided impaired test sequences.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix D: Packaging for Shipment
Your instrument was originally shipped by Tektronix in a carton with packaging
components designed to protect the instrument from damage during shipment. If
you need to ship the instrument to another location, it is strongly recommended
that you use the original shipping carton and packaging components to provide
adequate protection during shipment.
CAUTION. To prevent the loss of your instrument’s warranties, Tektronix strongly
recommends that you use your original shipping carton (one that is in good
condition) when you ship the instrument to another location or when you return
the instrument to a Tektronix service center for repair.
Tektronix cannot honor the instrument’s warranties if the instrument arrives at
the service center damaged and it was not shipped in its original carton or in a
replacement carton (and its supporting packaging material) purchased from
Tektronix. If you lose your original packaging material, contact your Tektronix
representative to obtain replacement packaging.
Packaging Inspection
When you prepare to ship your instrument to another location, be sure to inspect
your existing packaging materials for condition, missing components and
vintage.
H
If the condition of your existing packaging materials is poor, or if you are
missing some of the components, it is strongly recommended that you order
a new packaging kit. The new packaging kit will accommodate both the
portable and the rackmount versions of the instrument cabinet.
If your existing packaging materials are in good condition, compare them
against Figures D--1 and D--2 to determine which packaging procedure to
use. Use the procedure associated with your existing packaging materials.
H
The configuration (vintage) of the packaging materials is important to note.
Replacement components for the old-design packaging materials are no
longer available. Also, the components of the new and old designs are not
interchangeable. If your packaging materials are of the old design, and
require any replacement components, you must order a new packaging kit.
If your instrument was originally shipped in the older design packaging and
you have converted the cabinet from portable to rackmount configuration,
use the new design packaging which contained the rackmount conversion kit,
or order a new design shipping kit.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
D- 1
Appendix D: Packaging for Shipment
Replacement Packaging Materials
New packaging materials are available from Tektronix. To obtain these items,
contact your nearest Tektronix representative.
The replacement packaging kit, Tektronix part number 065-0651-XX, includes
all of the packaging material shown in Figure D--1. Each packaging component
in the illustration has an index number, which corresponds to reference numbers
in the packaging procedure.
1
2
3
4
Note: The keyboard, mouse, manual, and their boxes do not need
to be returned with the instrument for servicing. A protective bag for
the instrument is included in the packaging kit, but is not shown.
Figure D- 1: Repackaging the instrument (new packaging)
D- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix D: Packaging for Shipment
Repackaging Procedure (New Design)
When the instrument is shipped, it is important to package it well to protect the
instrument. Figure D--1 shows how to repackage the instrument for shipment
using the new packaging materials. It is not necessary to return the accessories
received with the instrument when returning the instrument for repair.
NOTE. The packaging materials illustrated in Figure D--1 will accommodate
both the portable and the rackmount versions of the instrument cabinet.
1. If the instrument is to be shipped to a Tektronix field office for repair, attach
a tag to the instrument showing the following:
H
Owner’s name and address
H
Instrument serial number
H
Description of the problem(s) encountered and/or service required.
2. Place the protective front cover on the front of the instrument.
3. Place the instrument in the protective bag. The bag prevents dust moisture,
or other debris from entering the cabinet.
4. Fold the top of the bag neatly over the top of the instrument to make it as flat
as possible and seal with packing tape.
5. Place the front cushion (3) over the front of the instrument.
6. Place the rear cushion (2) over the rear of the instrument.
7. Carefully lift the instrument with front and rear cushions attached and lower
into the shipping box (4) as indicated by Figure D--1.
8. Position the tray (1) into the top of the box, pressing the tray down until it
rests on the tops of the front and rear cushions.
NOTE. To ensure packaging integrity and product safety, the tray (1) must be
installed regardless if any accessories are being included in the package.
9. If you are shipping the accessories, arrange the accessories in the tray.
10. Close and tape the shipping box.
11. Attach the appropriate shipping documents needed to ship the instrument to
its destination.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
D- 3
Appendix D: Packaging for Shipment
Repackaging Procedure (Old Design)
If your instrument was shipped in the older packaging materials as shown in
Figure D--2, inspect your existing packaging materials to make sure they are
complete and in good condition as described in Packaging Inspection on
page D--1. If your existing earlier packaging materials are in good condition,
follow the procedure below to repackage your instrument for shipment.
When the instrument is shipped, it is important to package it well to protect the
instrument. Figure D--2 shows how to repackage the instrument for shipment
using the old packaging materials. It is not necessary to return the accessories
received with the instrument when returning the instrument for repair.
NOTE. The packaging materials illustrated in Figure D--2 will accommodate
only the portable version of the instrument cabinet.
1
2
3
4
5
Note: The keyboard, mouse, and
manual boxes do not need to be
returned with the instrument for
servicing.
Figure D- 2: Repackaging the instrument (old packaging)
D- 4
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix D: Packaging for Shipment
The inner shipping box, pads, and protective bag provide the necessary
protection to allow the shipping materials of the outer shipping box to correctly
support the product for shipment. Pack the inner shipping box as follows:
1. If an instrument is to be shipped to a Tektronix field office for repair, attach a
tag to the instrument showing the following:
H
Owner’s name and address
H
Instrument serial number
H
Description of the problem(s) encountered and/or service required.
2. If you have the original packaging material, start by placing one of the
spacer pads in the bottom of the inner box (3). Position the side of the pad
with the smaller, square holes against the side of the box as shown in
Figure D--3.
Bottom spacer pad
Outside edge of box
Spacer pad
positioned inside the
bottom of the box
Figure D- 3: Placement of bottom spacer pad in inner shipping box
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
D- 5
Appendix D: Packaging for Shipment
3. Place the protective front cover on the front of the instrument.
4. Place the instrument in the protective bag. The bag prevents dust, moisture,
or other debris from entering the cabinet.
5. Fold the top of the bag neatly over the top of the instrument to make it as flat
as possible and seal with packing tape.
6. Place the bagged instrument in the inner shipping box. The small feet on the
bottom of the cabinet go in the square holes in the spacing pad and the larger
feet near the front of the instrument go in the larger rectangular holes. The
bezel end of the cabinet fits over the edge of the spacer pad.
7. Place the other spacer pad on top of the instrument. Place the side with the
small square holes against the side of the box. The protective front cover on
the bezel of the instrument is not covered by the top spacer pad.
8. Close and tape the inner shipping box (3).
9. Place one of the support inserts (4) in the bottom of the outer shipping box,
film side up as shown in Figure D--2.
10. Place the sealed inner shipping box (3) in the center of the bottom support
insert in the outer shipping box (4).
11. Put the second support insert (2) over the inner shipping box, film side
down.
NOTE. It may be necessary to pre-stretch the film in the support inserts by
pushing down firmly several times on the top support insert.
12. Place the top tray (1) in the box. If you are not shipping accessories with the
instrument, close and tape the outer shipping box (5).
13. When shipping the accessories, place the two accessory trays in the top tray,
then arrange the accessories in the trays.
14. Close and tape the outer shipping box (5).
15. Attach the appropriate shipping documents needed to ship the instrument to
its destination.
D- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix E: Video Test Sequences
The video test sequences are provided on CD-ROM in 601--525 and 601-625
digital video formats. There are five compact discs for the 525 sequences and
five compact discs for the 625 sequences. The disc contents and the characteristics of the video in the test sequences are shown in Table E--1 for 601-525 format
and in Table E--2 for 602-625 format. Each of the files is provided as Header
Only and Header Plus video test sequences for the generator. The analyzer
references are extracted from the generator video sequences during loading.
NOTE. Sequences of the same name in 525 and 625 formats do not necessarily
have exactly the same content. Though very similar, the test sequences were
acquired at different times; they were not converted from one format to the other.
Table E- 1: Video test sequences for 601-525 format
CD
number
File
name
Sequence title
Characteristic
Motion
Source
1
Flower
Flower Garden
Color details, landscape
Slow Pan
CCIR 15
Cheer
Cheerleaders
Fast complex sports, rich background
Sports
CCIR 39
Kiel
Kiel Harbor 4
Luminance detail, landscape
Zoom
CCIR 26
Tempete
Tempete
Horizontal, vertical, luminance, color
detail
Random motion
CCIR 44
Susie
Susie
Skin tone, talking head
Slow
CCIR 16
Tennis
Table tennis
Multiple random motion, sports
Pan
CCIR 29
Football1 Football1
Sports, busy, large objects
Rapid motion
CCIR 38
Football2 Football2
Slowly milling people, sports
Slow moving objects
CCIR 38
Ferris
Ferris Wheel
Luminance and color details
Fast, complex
CCIR 36
Diva
Diva
Titles on busy scene
Slow
CCIR 43
Mobile
Mobile and Calendar
Random motion of objects
Slow
CCIR 30
Shinjuku
Shinjuku
Horizontal and vertical detail
Slow pan
CCIR 37
Wool
Balls of wool
Moving colors
Medium
CCIR 27
Popple
Popple
Moving colors
Pan, rotate
CCIR 28
Lily
Lily Pond
Luminance resolution
Still
CCIR 1
2
3
4
5
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
E- 1
Appendix E: Video Test Sequences
Table E- 2: Video test sequences for 601-625 format
CD number
File
name
Sequence title
Characteristic
Motion
Source
1
Flower
Flower Garden
Color details, landscape
Slow Pan
CCIR 15
Soccer
Soccer
Sports action
Fast
RAI
Kiel
Kiel Harbor 4
Luminance detail. landscape
Zoom
CCIR 26
Tempete
Tempete
Horizontal, vertical, luminance, color detail
Random motion
CCIR 44
Susie
Susie
Skin tone, talking head
Slow
CCIR 16
Tennis
Table tennis
Multiple random motion,
sports
Pan
CCIR 29
Ski
Ski race
Sports, moving objects
Pan, zoom
RAI
Auto
Auto race
Sports, moving objects
Fast
RAI
BBC
BBC disc
Random movement
Circular
CCIR 23
Diva
Diva
Titles on busy scene
Slow
CCIR 43
Mobile
Mobile and Calendar
Random motion of objects
Slow
CCIR 30
Sailboat
Sailboat
Moving colors
Slow
CCIR 14
Wool
Balls of wool
Moving colors
Medium
CCIR 27
Popple
Popple
Moving colors
Pan, rotate
CCIR 28
Lily
Lily Pond
Luminance resolution
Still
CCIR 1
2
3
4
5
The impaired video test sequences are provided to check the functionality of the
PQA300 system. The impaired test sequences are provided as Mobile Header
Plus sampled at different bit rates. When they are measured, the reference used in
all cases is the Mobile+ reference sequence as identified from the header ID of
the captured test sequence.
Table E- 3: Impaired video test sequences disk
E- 2
Sequence format
Sequence title
Sample rate
601-525
Mobile3mbs+.601
3 Mbits/sec
601-525
Mobile6mbs+.601
6 Mbits/sec
601-525
Mobile9mbs+.601
9 Mbits/sec
601-625
Mobile3mbs+.601
3 Mbits/sec
601-625
Mobile6mbs+.601
6 Mbits/sec
601-625
Mobile9mbs+.601
9 Mbits/sec
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix F: PQA300 System Error Messages
The PQA300 operating system displays error messages when there is an error in
configuration or when an expected signal is missing or incorrect. A configuration
error message occurs if an action has been initiated when something in the
underlying configuration for that action has an improper setting. For example,
you click on Results and the error message “No results selected” appears.
Configuration errors are corrected by making the correct configuration settings.
In the case of the example, you would right click on the Results soft key and
select one or more results to display.
System errors occur when an expected condition is not met. Some of those errors
may be corrected by correcting the input signal, such as making sure the
amplitude is correct, that there is burst on the composite video or S-Video signal,
or that you have the correct format signal applied.
Decoder Board Error Messages
Some error messages indicate a fatal error that prevents acquisition. Other errors
indicate an out-of-range condition, but do not cause the PQA300 system to
become inoperative. If the error persists after the corrective action has been tried,
refer the problem to a qualified service person.
Table F- 1: Decoder error messages
Error messages
Meaning
Action to take
Blanking
Indicates that the internal digital blanking circuit is
making many corrections in one direction and none
in the other. This is a normal condition when the
circuit is stabilizing, but should not happen for more
than an few seconds.
Check that the applied video is within normal range,
try connecting a known good signal to test.
Burst Lock
Indicates that the internal timing circuit is not in the
slow speed, low jitter mode.
Burst Present
Indicates that the amplitude of the burst on the input
is not sufficient to allow proper timing extraction.
Input Video Over Range
- Check for Proper Termination
This message appears when either A/D converter
Check the input signal amplitude. Check that the
indicates clipping. This normally occurs if the input is loop-through is properly terminated, either into a
more than about 125% of normal.
75 Ω system or with a 75 Ω termination on the
unused loop-through connector.
Check that the correct input standard signal is
applied. The input signal may not have burst or it
may have excessive noise. Apply a known good
In the Version 3.0 software release, Burst Lock is not signal to test.
a fatal error, but a warning. This allows capture and
measurement of a slightly jittery signal.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Check the burst on the input signal or apply a known
good signal to test.
F- 1
Appendix F: PQA300 System Error Messages
Table F- 1: Decoder error messages (cont.)
Error messages
Meaning
Action to take
Master Lock
Indicates a combination of sync present, burst
present, burst lock, serial lock, and several more
internal timing errors from the board horizontal
counters, the vertical counters and color frame
decision circuits. The master lock flag is held high
until everything is stable and ready to measure.
Master lock is considered a fatal error if it persists.
Check that video format is correct (NTSC or PAL).
The error will also occur if the input is non-standard
video such as from a VCR that has not been
time-base-corrected. Apply a known good signal to
test.
Note: The Burst Lock error is not included in the
Master Lock error in Version 3.0 firmware.
Serial Lock
Indicates that the output serializer is not locked. The Check all the input and signal interconnections.
message means that the 601 output from the
decoder module is probably not working.
Sync Present
Indicates that no sync pulses are being detected on Check that the decoder is correct set for the type of
the input. The error happens when there is no signal signal applied. Apply a known good signal to test.
connected or it is very low in amplitude. It can also
happen when the signal source is incorrectly
selected, such as asking for a S-Video signal when
the input is really a composite signal and visa-versa.
Encoder Board Error Messages
The encoder module has two sets of error messages depending on the Lockup
selection in the Encoder Configuration menu. One set is for Lockup using the
serial video input as the lockup (genlock) source. The second is for when you are
using the black burst and an applied analog reference as the source of lockup.
Table F- 2: Encoder error messages
Error messages
Meaning
Action to take
Serial Phase Lock Loop
Indicates that the 27 MHz VCO (voltage-controlled
oscillator) is not locked to the recovered clock of the
incoming serial video signal.
When this error happens at the same time as the
Video Lock error message it indicates the same
problems. If the Serial Phase Lock Loop error occurs
alone, a problem with the encoder module is
indicated and the problem needs to be referred to a
qualified service person.
Video Lock
Indicates that the serial signal is absent or is too low Check that a 270 MB/s serial signal of the correct
in amplitude, or that the serial receiver is not locked amplitude is applied to the 601 In connector of the
to the incoming serial signal.
encoder module. Apply a known good signal to test.
Serial video lockup
F- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix F: PQA300 System Error Messages
Table F- 2: Encoder error messages (cont.)
Error messages
Meaning
Action to take
Black burst lockup
Burst Lock
Indicates that the internal phase lock loop circuit that Check that the Genlock signal is the same format
controls the 27 MHz VCO (voltage-controlled
(NTSC or PAL) as selected by the system.
oscillator) is not in the slow-speed, low-jitter mode.
Check that the Genlock signal has a burst and that it
is not excessively noisy. Apply a known good signal
to test.
Burst Present
Indicates that the amplitude of the burst on the input
is not sufficient to allow proper timing extraction.
Check the burst on the input signal or connect a
known good signal to the Genlock loop through to
test.
Master Lock
Indicates a combination of sync present, burst
present, burst lock, serial lock, and several more
internal timing errors from the board horizontal
counters, the vertical counters and color frame
decision circuits. The master lock flag is held high
until everything is stable and ready to measure.
Check that the video format is correct (NTSC or
PAL). The error will also occur if the input is
non-standard video such as from a VCR that has not
been time-base-corrected. Apply a known good
signal to test.
If Master Lock, Sync Locked, and Burst Present
Check that an analog reference video signal is
errors are listed together, typically there is no analog applied to the Genlock loop through on the encoder
Black Burst input or it is very low amplitude video.
board. Apply a known good signal to test.
If Master Lock and Burst Lock are listed together, it
may be because the incoming Black Burst video
format does not match the format selected for the
system.
Check that the signal applied to the Genlock loop
through is the same format as selected for the test.
Either apply the correct format analog reference
video (NTSC or PAL I) or use Serial Digital Video
lockup.
If Master Lock is the only error message listed there
is either a format matching problem or an internal
timing problem on the encoder module.
Check that the Serial Video input matches the
format selected for the system (NTSC or PAL I).
Check that the Black Burst video format applied to
the Genlock loop through matches the system
selected format.
If the formats are correct and the error persists, refer
the problem to a qualified service person.
Unknown
Indicates an unknown error has occurred. One
possible cause is that the output serializer is not
locked. This condition probably indicates that the
601 output from the encoder board is not working.
Check the 601 serial output of the encoder for a
correct signal. You can use an external serial digital
monitor to view the signal to check.
Refer the problem to a qualified service person.
A second possibility is that the SC/H phase lock loop
is not locked to the internal 27 MHz clock.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
F- 3
Appendix F: PQA300 System Error Messages
System Error Messages
Most of the error messages are associated with parameters. The parameters that
can be used are:
H
Request Names: Acquire request, jnd request, and jndPrecompute request
H
Standard Names: NTSC and PAL
H
Port Names: port A (Main) and port B (Ref)
Table F- 3: System error messages
Error messages
Meaning
Action to take
General errors
<-- - Error event, szV4, #0x00000000,
req=<request name> type=OutOfMem,
This error means one of two things:
1. Memory on the DSP became too
fragmented and a large allocation failed.
Retry the operation.
2. A memory leak has occurred.
Restart the application. The DSP memory
is released for use.
Unexpected exception
This error occurs when there is a serious
internal software error. There are no known
errors of this type in the released version of
software.
Contact your Tektronix representative or
Tektronix Customer Service. Refer to
Contacting Tektronix in the Preface of this
manual.
Can’t get async read results: semaphore
timeout
This error can occur on rare occasions. It
may indicate a DSP hardware problem.
Restart the application. If the condition
persists, contact your Tektronix representative or Tektronix Customer Service.
601 input connect detect carrier. . . check
your connections.
This error indicates that a 601 digital signal
is not detected on the input.
Check your cable connections. Apply a
known good signal to test. Check the input
signal for a valid 601 serial digital format.
No input signal is present on <port name>
The error message defines the meaning.
Check for a valid input signal on the named
port.
You have requested <standard name> but
port <port name> is currently receiving
<standard name>
This error indicates that the standard
Apply the correct standard signal or change
requested for an operation is not valid for
the configuration to match the applied
the signal that is applied to the named port. signal standard.
Capture errors
601 display errors
601 output requires inputs for port a and
port b either be disconnected or the same
standard as the output, in this case;
<standard name> currently port <port
name> is receiving <standard name).
F- 4
This error indicates that you have selected
to generate a different video standard on
the 601 display than the analyzer is
configured to capture.
Make sure that the analyzer output (601
display) and input (capture) are the same
video standard. The DSP can only operate
in one format, so the input and output must
match.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix F: PQA300 System Error Messages
Table F- 3: System error messages (cont.)
Error messages
Meaning
Action to take
The manual left and right cropping is larger
than the image (the image width is 720 )
This error means that the manual left and
right cropping values you have set overlap.
Restore the default cropping values or set
the left and right cropping values to valid
cropping values.
The manual top and bottom cropping is
larger than the image (the image height is
486 )
This error means that the manual top and
bottom cropping values you have set
overlap.
Restore the default cropping values or set
the top and bottom cropping values to valid
cropping values.
<file name>: can’t write: tried 699840,
did 0: file system full
This error occurs when there is not enough
disk space on the hard drive to save the
file. You can get this error when a capture
is trying to save or when measurement
results are being saved when the disk drive
runs out of storage space.
Remove some older capture and results
files and try again. Refer to Disk Space
Management on page 3-- 25 for a further
discussion of this error.
Measure errors
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
F- 5
Appendix F: PQA300 System Error Messages
F- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
This section lists and describes the Tcl commands that the PQA300 system uses
(see Table G--2) in the function scripts generated in Function Learn Mode.
Tcl Programming
Tcl programming is being used in more embedded systems because of its
availability, ease of programming, and extensibility. A set of core commands are
common to most Tcl implementations. These core commands and explanations
for their use are described in the book Tcl and the Tk Toolkit, by John K.
Ousterhout.
PQA300 functions are ASCII text files containing lists of Tcl commands. You
can create functions using the Function Learn mode, or using a PC with a text
editor capable of producing an ASCII text file (with line feeds and/or carriage
returns). A function file created using a separate PC can be transferred to the
PQA300 system function directory either from a 3.5 in floppy disk or through a
network connection to the Windows NT server. If you create the file using the
ASCII editor of the Windows NT server, use the Save As dialog box and save to
the PQA300 function directory.
Tcl Functions in the PQA300
Tcl functions automate control the PQA300. Tcl functions are executed in a
separate process, interacting with the PQA300 in a manner independent of but
similar to the user interface. Tcl function execution and user interface actions
may be interleaved in any manner. This capability can be used to set configuration parameters as part of the overall PQA300 state, but you should take care to
understand the assumptions made by the functions they use. For example, if a
Tcl function changes a configuration parameter at the same time you change a
(perhaps different) parameter in the same configuration menu, either change may
undo the effect of the other change.
Tcl Functions and CPU
Resources
Tcl functions compete for CPU resources with other running processes,
especially the PQA300 system itself. The normal synchronization between Tcl
and PQA300 execution is usually adequate, but in special cases it may be
desirable to execute pqa sleep Tcl commands to release the CPU for other
tasks. The pqa sleep command is preferable to the built-in Tcl “after #”
command for releasing the CPU, because it also checks for scheduled commands, callbacks, presses of the Function button to manually stop function
execution, and PQA300 shutdown.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
G- 1
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
All PQA300 Tcl commands provide these checks. If Tcl code that does not call
PQA300 commands is to be executed for any significant period of time (the
amount depending on the desired responsiveness), then invocations of the pqa
poll command should be interspersed to perform these checks. Without some
PQA300 command (such as pqa poll) inside an infinite loop, the only way to
stop Tcl execution is to manually abort each of the PQA300 processes, since the
built-in Tcl interpreter does not perform such checks.
Tcl function execution is initiated in the following situations:
H
Upon startup
H
By clicking the Function button
H
By a scheduled function command
H
By clicking the “Check for Errors” soft key during Function Edit
Additionally, if a Tcl function is already executing (indicated by the green light
on the Function soft key), Tcl function callbacks may be executed in certain
situations. The callbacks are similar to typical interrupt handlers in that they
suspend execution at an arbitrary point (at a PQA300 Tcl command), continue to
completion, and then resume the suspended execution.
Upon Startup. Upon startup, and also upon execution of the function reset
command, the PQA300 resets the Tcl interpreter and invokes the PQA300 file
bin/init.tcl from the startup directory. The bin/init.tcl file itself invokes function/
initialize.tcl, which provides a location for customizing the default configuration
settings. You can edit the file function/initialize.tcl (in the startup directory) to
define a uniform Tcl programming environment.
NOTE. Unlike the working directory, the startup directory cannot be changed
during PQA300 function operation.
Clicking the Function Button. Clicking the Function button, if Learn mode is
disabled, starts execution of the Tcl function file specified in the Function
Configuration menu. Execution continues until that function either finishes or is
stopped by clicking the Function soft key, or until a function stop, function error,
function reset, or pqa shutdown Tcl command is invoked. Function files are
always stored in the function subdirectory under the startup directory and can
also be invoked either by the pqa source function command or the load_function
or load_optional_function procedures predefined in initialize.tcl. Arbitrary Tcl
source code files can be invoked by the pqa source file command.
G- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Scheduled Function Command. When the time for a scheduled function occurs,
that function executes the commands in the function script, temporarily
suspending any other function that may be executing (like a callback).
Checking for Errors. The Check for Errors soft key in the Function Edit window
invokes normal Tcl execution of the source code, but in pqa execution off mode.
In execution off mode, PQA300 Tcl commands are prevented from modifying
the PQA300 state. The pqa execution command, as an exception, turns pqa
execution mode on or off. Note that all normal Tcl commands, such as while and
exec, are completely enabled during this mode — only the PQA300 commands
are disabled, so you must take care to not cause inadvertent execution.
In pqa execution off mode, many PQA300 commands are semantically disabled
and are unlikely to return correct values. The Check for Errors mode is useful for
syntax checking, but it is not generally useful for checking code that depends on
results returned by PQA300 commands (and it can be quite misleading). For
such functions, Check for Errors mode is generally only useful with a pqa exec
on command inserted at the top, and in that case it triggers full normal execution
of the Tcl code.
Callbacks to
User-Specified Tcl
Functions
Callbacks to user-specified Tcl functions can occur while a PQA300 Tcl function
is executing, when one of the following occurs: changing working directory,
changing mode, changing the display status (in the lower-left-hand corner of the
display), generating an alert dialog box, or generating a query dialog box. These
latter three kinds of callbacks only occur for events generated by the PQA300,
not events generated directly by PQA300 Tcl code. The code in the PQA300
bin/init.tcl file shows how to set up callback functions, and what the parameters
are.
You may override these default callback handlers if desired, using callback
commands (those with callback in their name), but you must take care to
maintain the expected functionality. In particular, the PQA300 system waits until
each panel query callback is matched (eventually) by exactly one panel query
reply command. Specifying no callback merely returns the preexisting callback,
whereas explicitly specifying a null string disables a particular callback.
Many other PQA300 commands take optional parameters, and are used both to
set and retrieve values, depending on whether or not the optional parameter was
specified. In these cases the returned value is the current value of the parameter,
whether it has been set or not (unless pqa execution off mode is in effect, in
which case the returned values are generally unreliable).
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
G- 3
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Tcl Interface Commands
The following information describes the Grammar and the Tcl commands unique
to the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System.
Command Grammar
Descriptions
The command descriptions listed in Table G--1 and Table G--2 use a grammar
similar to Backus-Naur Form. Words either in lower or mixed case or enclosed in
quotes (””) are grammar terminals, and should appear as shown but without the
quote (””) marks. The null string as a Tcl parameter appears in the grammar (and
in Tcl) as ””; this is different than a grammar derivation of the empty string
which has no Tcl representation whatsoever.
Lower or mixed case symbols with a dot, as in res.ults or user.Striped, indicate
that either the full word (results or userStriped) or the abbreviation (res or user)
are accepted.
Integer ranges are specified in the following manner: 1 to 6. Float ranges are
specified in the following manner: 0.25 to 4.0.
Nonterminals in the grammar (such as SEQ_NAME) are typed in all UPPER
CASE and represent sets of alternatives; they are not intended to be incorporated
literally.
Optional arguments are specified with question marks before and after, like
?ARG? or ”?ARG...?”, the latter example specifying zero or more ARGUMENTS. For example, an OPT_INT or OPT_FLOAT may be either a numeric
value or the Tcl null string ””, or it may be missing entirely.
Alternatives are specified with the bar symbol ( | ), and may be parenthesized.
Thus, none | auto | manual (detected | ?CORRECTION_PARAM ...?) denotes
these four alternatives: none, auto, manual detected, or manual ?CORRECTION_PARAM...?, with the last alternative indicating zero or more correction
parameters are acceptable.
Return values, if present, are shown in the Return column in the command
descriptions in Table G--2. Return values are either single Tcl tokens or Tcl lists,
which are indicated by {}’s. For example, a return value {{TSEQ RSEL}...}
denotes a list of inner lists, each inner list having four elements (according to the
grammar, TSEQ always derives three tokens, and RSEL one). In addition to
what is specified by the grammar in Table G--1, PQA300 commands can
sometimes return null values, such as when newly initialized with factory
preferences.
G- 4
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 1: Grammar
Word
Description
SEQ_NAME
One or more chars ” a-zA-Z0-9” with optional +
PREF_FILE
Preference filename: one or more chars ” a-zA-Z0-9”
FUN_FILE
Function filename: one or more chars ” a-zA-Z0-9”
INT
Integer value - 2147483648 to 2147483647
FLOAT
A single precision floating point value
STRING
Any token whatsoever, including ””
STATUS
Encoded status value (see ”panel format status SSTATUS”)
PATHNAME
Filesystem pathname (directory or file)
DIR_PATH
Filesystem pathname of directory
TCL_FUNCTION
String of one or more chars ”-- _*$a-zA-Z0-9”
TIMESTAMP
YYYYMMDD-HHMMSS (example: 19991231-235959)
YYYYMMDD
Year month day (example: 20000101)
MM[:SS]
Minutes[:seconds] (ex: 1 2 59 1:59 59:59 00:01)
[[HH:]MM:]SS
[Hours:]minutes:]seconds (example: 1 2:30 23:59:59)
TRUE
1 | t.rue | ”T” | ”True” | ”TRUE” | y.es | ”Y” | ”Yes” | ”YES”
| on | ”On” | ”ON”
FALSE
0 | f.alse | ”F” | ”False” | ”FALSE” | n.o | ”N” | ”No” | ”NO”
| off | ”Off” | ”OFF”
BOOL
TRUE | FALSE
COMMAND
STRING ?STRING . . .?
PREFIX
?STRING . . .?
NNEG_INT
0 to 2147483647
COUNT
NNEG_INT
HOURS
0 to 1000000
MINUTES
0 to 1000000
SECONDS
0 to 1000000
MILLISECONDS
NNEG_INT
DATE
sun.day | mon.day | tue.sday | wed.nesday | thu.rsday |
fri.day | sat.urday | tod.ay | tom.orrow | YYYYMMDD
TIME
now | TIMESTAMP | ?DATE? HOURS MINUTES SECONDS
SEVERITY
note | warning | error | fatal
SSTATUS
STRING | STATUS
QUERY_TYPE
ok | ok-cancel | retry-cancel | yes-no | yes-no-cancel |
abort-retry-ignore
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
G- 5
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 1: Grammar (cont.)
G- 6
Word
Description
QUERY_REPLY
ok | cancel | retry | yes | no | abort | ignore
PQA_QUERY
overwrite | save
OPT_INT
?INT | ””?)
OPT_FLOAT
?FLOAT | ””?
CROPPING_PARAM
left.Crop OPT_INT | right.Crop OPT_INT | top.Crop OPT_INT
| bottom.Crop OPT_INT
CROPPING
leftCrop INT rightCrop INT topCrop INT bottomCrop INT
CORRECTION_PARAM
xShiftLuma
xShiftCr
xShiftCb
yShiftLuma
yShiftCr
yShiftCb
leftCrop
rightCrop
topCrop
bottomCrop
lumaLevel
crLevel
cbLevel
lumaGain
crGain
cbGain
MEASURE_CORRECTION
none | auto | manual (detected |
?CORRECTION_PARAM...?)
CORRECTION
xShiftLuma FLOAT xShiftCr FLOAT xShiftCb FLOAT
yShiftLuma FLOAT yShiftCr FLOAT yShiftCb FLOAT leftCrop
INT rightCrop INT topCrop INT bottomCrop INT lumaLevel
FLOAT crLevel FLOAT cbLevel FLOAT lumaGain FLOAT
crGain FLOAT cbGain FLOAT
MEASURE_CORR_RESULT
none | auto | CORRECTION
PQR_CAL_PARAM
gamma
threshold
maxLuminance
ambientLight
xRed
yRed
xGreen
yGreen
xBlue
yBlue
xWhite
yWhite
PQR_DISPLAY_CAL
default | manual ?PQR_CAL_PARAM...?
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_INT |
OPT_INT |
OPT_INT |
OPT_INT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
OPT_FLOAT |
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 1: Grammar (cont.)
Word
Description
PQR_CALIBRATION
gamma FLOAT threshold FLOAT maxLuminance FLOAT
ambientLight FLOAT xRed FLOAT yRed FLOAT xGreen
FLOAT yGreen FLOAT xBlue FLOAT yBlue FLOAT xWhite
FLOAT yWhite FLOAT
PQR_DCAL_RESULT
default | manual PQR_CALIBRATION
TEK_USER
tek | userStriped
STRIPING
headerPlus | headerOnly
SAMPLE_TYPE
gray | 4-4-4 | 4-2-2 | 4-2-0
COLOR_SPACE
gray | yc | yuv | rgb | rgb555 | rgb332
FIELD
1 to 300
SEQUENCE_INFO
TEK_USER INT STRIPING SAMPLE_TYPE COLOR_SPACE
rate FLOAT width INT height INT first FIELD last FIELD id INT
COMPOSITE_FILTER
adaptiveLine | notch | comb | adaptiveField | adaptiveFrame
ATTR_NAME
pqrMeasureLuma | droppedFrames | referenceName
HW_SLOT
1 to 6
HW_CONFIG
HW_SLOT (unknown | dsp | encoder | decoder)
HW_USAGE
HW_SLOT (unused | analyzer | generator)
CONTRAST
0.25 to 4.0
BRIGHTNESS
-256 to 256
RESOLUTION
full | double | half | quarter
STANDARD
601-525 | 601-625
FORMAT
STANDARD | ntsc | ntsc-ns | pal-i
OPT_SEQ
?FORMAT | ”-- ”? ?SEQ_NAME | ”-”? ?TIMESTAMP | ”-- ”?
RSEQ
FORMAT SEQ_NAME (TIMESTAMP | ”-”)
TSEQ
FORMAT SEQ_NAME TIMESTAMP
RSEL
pqr-luma | pqr-comp | psnr-luma
SSEL
gen.erate | ref.erence | cap.ture | RSEL
RESULT
TSEQ RSEL ?RSEL...?
CALLBACK
TCL_FUNCTION | ””
WAIT_REASON
stopped | enabled
MODE
capture | playback | defect | subregion | measure | results | display
CAPTURE_SELECTION
new ref.erence | test | user.Striped
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
G- 7
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
The list of commands given in Table G--2 is the complete set of PQA300 unique
Tcl commands.
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions
Command
Return
Description
Pqa execution commands
pqa poll
Does the checks performed by all other PQA300 Tcl
commands (scheduled commands, callbacks, the function
stop button, and PQA300 shutdown).
pqa sleep SECONDS
Pauses function execution the specified
p
amount of time,,
performing the checks listed for ”pqa poll” in the meantime.
pqa sleep ms MILLISECONDS
pqa exec.ution ?BOOL?
0|1
Turns ”pqa execution” on or off if the parameter is specified,
and then returns 1 if pqa execution mode is currently on.
If pqa execution mode is off (which is the default case when
doing ”Check for Errors”), PQA300 Tcl command execution
sematics are disabled, and PQA300 Tcl command return
values are unreliable.
To make ”Check for Errors” useful for debugging complex
functions, put ”pqa exec on” at the top of the file to trigger full
execution mode (as opposed to syntax check mode).
pqa source fun.ction FUN_FILE
Executes the named Tcl function.
pqa source file PATHNAME
Executes the Tcl source code in the named file.
pqa timestamp TIME
TIMESTAMP
Converts the provided TIME into a TIMESTAMP.
As with all TIMEs, if the TIME specifies no DATE, the TIME
denotes today’s time unless it is a more than a minute in the
past, in which case it denotes tomorrow’s time.
Similarly, if a TIME specifies a specific weekday that matches
today, then the TIME denotes today’s time unless it is a
minute or more in the past, in which case it denotes next
week’s time.
pqa timestamp split TIME
{YYYYMMDD HOURS MINUTES SECONDS}
Splits a timestamp (or the current time) into its component
parts. It is equivalent to ”pqa timestamp split [pqa timestamp
TIME]”.
pqa schedule list
{{TIMESTAMP COMMAND} ... }
Returns a list of all scheduled commands and their
TIMESTAMPs.
pqa schedule TIME COMMAND
{TIMESTAMP COMMAND}
Schedules a command at the given time. When the time
occurs, the command will be executed if it hasn’t been
unscheduled and the PQA300 is still running.
pqa unschedule (TIME | ”-- ”)
PREFIX
COUNT
Unschedules all commands at the give time (or any time if
”-- ” is specified), if they start with the given PREFIX. The
number of commands unscheduled is returned.
pqa recompute seq.uence data.base
G- 8
Recomputes the PQA300 sequence database in the current
working directory, based on the sequences currently available.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
Pqa execution commands
Appends the given strings to the log file ”log/log.txt” in the
startup directory. If [pqa transcripting log] is true, then they will
also be appended to the transcript window.
pqa log STRING ?STRING . . .
The log directory must already exist to log to it.
pqa transcript STRING
?STRING...?
Appends the given strings to the transcript window. If [pqa
logging transcript] is true, then they will also be appended to
the ”log/log.txt” file if it exists.
pqa transcripting log ?BOOL?
0|1
Optionally sets whether transcript messages are to be logged,
and then returns the current state.
pqa startup dir.ectory
DIR_PATH
Returns the pathname of the PQA300 startup directory.
pqa dir.ectory ?DIR_PATH?
DIR_PATH
Optionally sets the PQA300 working directory, and then
returns its pathname.
pqa initialize ?PREF_FILE?
pqa mode ?previous?
Stops capture, playback, measure, generate, results, and
display-601, resets any panel results, and initializes with the
given preference file.
MODE
pqa shutdown
Returns either the current or previous PQA300 mode.
Shuts down the PQA300 application.
Pqa files commands
pqa files pref.erence ?PREF_FILE?
{PREF_FILE...}
Return a list of existing preference files. If a file is specified,
the list is either empty or contains just that filename.
pqa files fun.ction ?FUN_FILE?
{FUN_FILE...}
Returns a list of existing function files. If a file is specified, the
list is either empty or contains just that filename.
pqa files ?map | res.ult? ?SSEL . . .? {{RSEQ SSEL}...}
OPT_SEQ
Returns a list of available sequence or result files. All existing
files are returned, except as limited by parameters. The
optional ?map | res.ult? parameter can be used to select only
map (.jlm, .jcm, .plm) or result (.jlr, .jcr, .jlm) files of
measurement results returned.
Pqa filename commands
pqa filename pref.erence
PREF_FILE
PATHNAME
pqa filename fun.ction FUN_FILE
PATHNAME
pqa filename ?map | res.ult? RSEQ
SSEL
PATHNAME
Returns the pathname of a given sequence or measurement
result. The optional ?map | res.ult? parameter can be used to
distinguish map (.jlm, .jcm, .plm) from result (.jlr, .jcr, .jlm)
filenames for measurement results.
pqa filename split PATHNAME
{RSEQ SSEL}
Parses and splits the filename at the end of the given
PATHNAME into its component parts. This is (approximately)
an inverse function to ”pqa filename”.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Returns the pathname of the given preference or function file,
includingg file extension.
G- 9
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
pqa seq.uence info.rmation RSEQ
{SEQUENCE_INFO}
Returns various information about the given reference or
captured sequence. See SEQUENCE_INFO in Table G-- 1 for
what it returns.
pqa seq.uence attr.ibute
ATTR_NAME TSEQ ?RSEL?
{STRING}
Returns the value of the named attribute for the given
captured sequence or measurement result. See ATTR_NAME
in Table G-- 1 for a list of supported attributes.
pqa seq.uence detected correction
TSEQ
{CORRECTION}
Returns the detected correction parameters for the given
captured sequence. See CORRECTION in Table G-- 1 for what
it returns.
pqa seq.uence applied correction
TSEQ RSEL
{CORRECTION}
Returns the applied correction parameters for the given
measurement result. See CORRECTION in Table G-- 1 for
what it returns.
pqa display video contrast ?CONTRAST?
CONTRAST
pqa display video brightness
?BRIGHTNESS?
BRIGHTNESS
These commands adjust the contrast and brightness for
sequences
displayed,
VGA
q
p y , both for the internal computer
p
di l andd the
display
h externall 601 di
display
l monitor.
i S
Separate
controls are used for normal video, PQR maps, and PSNR
maps
maps.
pqa display pqr contrast ?CONTRAST?
CONTRAST
pqa display pqr brightness
?BRIGHTNESS?
BRIGHTNESS
pqa display psnr contrast ?CONTRAST?
CONTRAST
pqa display psnr brightness
?BRIGHTNESS?
BRIGHTNESS
Pqa sequence commands
Pqa display commands
Pqa callback commands
pqa callback dir.ectory ?CALLBACK? CALLBACK
pqa callback mode ?CALLBACK?
These two commands set callback functions for directory and
mode changes.
changes See the PQA300 file ”bin/init
”bin/init.tcl”
tcl” for how they
may be used.
Pqa hardware commands
pqa hardware config.uration
{HW_CONFIG...}
Returns the current hardware configuration.
pqa hardware usage
?HW_USAGE...?
{HW_USAGE...}
Optionally changes, and then returns, the current hardware
usage parameters.
Panel commands
panel save seq.uence
Saves the current unsaved sequence, if there is one.
panel step ?INT?
Equivalent to the panel VCR step control, for the given
number of steps (defaulting to one). Negative numbers step
backwards.
G- 10
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
Panel commands
panel seek (FIELD | end)
Equivalent to the panel VCR frame number, seek to
beginning, and seek to end controls. Field numbers range
from 1 to 120, or from 1 to 300 for generate sequences.
panel paused ?BOOL?
0|1
Optionally controls the panel VCR paused state, and then
returns the current state.
panel backward ?BOOL?
0|1
Optionally controls the panel VCR forward/backward state,
and then returns the current state.
panel control ?internal | external?
internal | external
Optionally controls whether the VCR panel controls the
internal computer VGA display or the external 601 display
monitor, and then returns the current state.
panel select ?SSEL?
?SSEL?
Optionally controls the VCR panel sequence selection, and
returns the current state.
panel choices
{SSEL...}
Returns the legitimate choices for the ”panel select”
command.
panel field ?min.imum | max.imum?
?FIELD?
Returns the current (or minimum, or maximum) field number
from the panel VCR control display. Field numbers range from
1 to 120, or from 1 to 300 for generate sequences.
panel interest region ?CROPPING_PARAM . . .?
{CROPPING}
Optionally sets, then returns the current region of interest.
A - 1 for any of the CROPPING parameters disables the
interest region.
panel display status
?STATUS?
Returns the current system status, as usually displayed on the
lower left corner of the panel. Due to the user interface also
using this field for other purposes, the returned value may not
track every value displayed in that field.
panel display status SSTATUS
Displays the given status in the system status field in the
lower left corner of the panel display. Due to the user interface
also using this field for other purposes, the displayed value
may actually be different sometimes.
Also, because of the asynchronous nature of the PQA300
system, it may take a short while before the given status
shows up as the result of the ”pqa display status” command.
A display status callback is NOT generated for this command.
panel display maintainAspect
?BOOL?
0|1
panel alert SEVERITY SSTATUS
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Optionally controls and returns the Display Settings / Maintain
Aspect Ratio bit.
Provides an alert dialog of the given SEVERITY to the user,
with the given text. SSTATUS may be either an internally-encoded status or a simple STRING containing user-readable
text.
G- 11
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
QUERY_REPLY
Generates a query dialog box, with the given SSTATUS
message and given QUERY_TYPE reply options, and returns
the user’s reply. SSTATUS may be either an internally-encoded status or a simple STRING containing user-readable
text.
Panel commands
panel query QUERY_TYPE SSTATUS
This command can only be used in conjunction with a ”panel
query callback” callback, and supplies the reply to the asked
query. It does not need to be called from inside the callback,
but each callback must result in exactly one reply or the
PQA300 waits. The given QUERY_REPLY must be one of the
QUERY_TYPE choices supplied to the callback. See the
PQA300 file ”bin/init.tcl” for how this command can be used.
panel query reply QUERY_REPLY
panel query prompt STRING
STRING
Displays a dialog box containing the STRING, and returns the
user response.
panel format status SSTATUS
STRING
Formats an potentially-encoded SSTATUS message into a
user-readable string.
Panel callback commands
panel callback display status ?CALL- CALLBACK
BACK?
panel callback alert SEVERITY
?CALLBACK?
These commands optionally set, and return, the current
callback function names. A CALLBACK of ”” can be used to
di bl particular
disable
i l callbacks.
llb k S
See bi
bin/init.tcl
/i i l ffor hhow these
h
can
be used.
panel callback query PQA_QUERY
?CALLBACK?
Panel sequence commands
panel seq.uence
?{RSEQ SSEL}?
panel seq.uence display-601
panel seq.uence captured
panel seq.uence unsaved
These command return, respectively, the sequence being
controlled
t ll d bby the
th panell VCR controls,
t l th
the sequence currently
tl
displayed on the internal computer VGA display, the sequence
currently displayed on the external 601 display monitor, the
current captured sequence,
sequence and the identity of the current
unsaved sequence if any.
Panel results commands
panel res.ults summary TSEQ RSEL ?FLOAT?
Returns the summary of the given measurement result, which
must have been specified in the most recent measurement or
results invocation.
panel res.ults info.rmation TSEQ
RSEL
?{SEQUENCE_INFO}?
Returns information about the given measurement result,
which must have been specified in the most recent
measurement or results invocation.
panel res.ults correction TSEQ
RSEL
?{CORRECTION}?
Returns the applied correction for the given measurement
result, which must have been specified in the most recent
measurement or results invocation.
G- 12
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
panel res.ults fields TSEQ RSEL
{{FIELD FLOAT}...}
Returns the field measurements for the given measurement
result, which must have been specified in the most recent
measurement or results invocation. Field numbers are
sequential, starting at 1.
panel res.ults frame corrections
TSEQ RSEL
{{FIELD CORRECTION}...}
Returns any frame corrections for the given measurement
result, which must have been specified in the most recent
measurement or results invocation. Field numbers are
sequential, starting at one.
panel res.ults striping TSEQ RSEL
?STRIPING?
Returns the kind of striping, headerOnly or headerPlus, for the
given measurement result, which must have been specified in
the most recent measurement or results invocation.
panel res.ults list ?RSEL...?
OPT_SEQ
{{TSEQ RSEL}... }
Returns the list of measurement results specified in the most
recent measurement or results invocation.
Panel results commands
panel res.ults clear
Clears any results specified in the most recent measurement
or results invocation. Measurement results files on disk are
unaffected.
Preference commands
preference save
Saves the current PQA300 configuration in the current
preference file.
preference restore
Restores the current PQA300 configuration from the current
preference file.
preference file ?PREF_FILE?
PREF_FILE
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the name of the
current preference file.
preference startup ?PREF_FILE?
PREF_FILE
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the name of the
preference file to be used upon PQA300 startup.
preference disabled
0|1
Returns whether preferences are currently disabled.
Encoder commands
encoder mode ?gaussian | brickwall? gaussian | brickwall
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the encoder filter
mode.
encoder lock ?serialVideo | blackBurst?
serialVideo | blackBurst
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the encoder lockup
mode.
decoder input ?comp.osite | yc?
composite | yc
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the decoder input
mode.
decoder filter comp.osite ?COMPOSITE_FILTER?
COMPOSITE_FILTER
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the decoder filter
selection used in composite mode.
Decoder commands
decoder filter yc ?adaptiveLine | sim- adaptiveLine | simple
ple?
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the decoder filter
selection used in yc mode.
G- 13
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
Capture commands
capture
Starts a capture, and waits for it to complete. For user-striped
sequences, a capture trigger command is needed to start the
actual capture of the sequence.
capture format ?FORMAT?
FORMAT
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the format in the
current capture configuration.
capture use ref.erence
?SEQ_NAME | ”-- ”?
SEQ_NAME | ”-- ”
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the reference
sequence name to be used for a capture. ”-” is used to
represent ”Any valid sequence”.
capture select
?CAPTURE_SELECTION?
new ref | test | userStriped
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the type of capture
to be performed.
capture name
CAPTURE_SELECTION
?SEQ_NAME?
SEQ_NAME
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the sequence name
to be used, depending on the type of capture.
capture striping ?STRIPING | unstriped?
STRIPING | unstriped
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the type of striping
to be applied to a captured userStriped sequence.
capture trigger
Triggers an already-started capture when capturing a
user-striped sequence. For capturing a user-striped sequence,
capture merely initializes the capture and waits for a trigger
before actually starting the capture.
capture triggered
0|1
Returns the state of the capture trigger.
capture autoMeasure ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the autoMeasure bit
in the capture configuration.
capture autoSave ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the autoSave bit in
the capture configuration.
capture timeout enabled ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the timeout enabled
bit in the capture configuration.
capture timeout ?MM[:SS]?
MM:SS
Optionally sets, and returns, the timeout duration in the
capture configuration.
Playback commands
playback start
Starts playback.
playback stop
Stops playback.
playback wait ?WAIT_REASON?
Waits for WAIT_REASON to become true. If unspecified,
waits until playback is both stopped and enabled.
playback source ?live | captured | generator |
seq.uence?
live | captured |
generator | sequence
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the source field for
the playback configuration.
playback looping
?continuous | count?
continuous | count
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the looping field in
the playback configuration.
G- 14
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
playback live format ?FORMAT?
FORMAT
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the format to be
used for live playback. The playback source must be ”live” for
this to take effect.
playback seq.uence OPT_SEQ
{RSEQ}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the sequence to be
played back. The playback source must be ”sequence” for
this to take effect.
playback count ?INT?
INT
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the loop count for
the playback configuration. The playback looping must be set
to ”count” for this to take effect.
playback interest region ?CROPPING_PARAM...?
{CROPPING}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the playback region
of interest. A - 1 in any CROPPING parameter will disable the
region of interest.
playback backward ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the forward/reverse
field of the playback configuration.
playback palindrome ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the palindrome field
of the playback configuration.
Playback commands
Measure commands
measure
Starts a measurement, and waits for it to complete.
measure seq.uence OPT_SEQ
{TSEQ}
Selects, if the option is supplied, and returns the sequence to
be measured.
measure select ?RSEL...?
{RSEL...}
Selects, if the option is supplied, and returns the set of
measurements to be applied.
measure save ?maps | values | none?
maps | values | none
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns what gets saved as
measurement results.
measure correction ?MEASURE_CORRECTION?
{MEASURE_CORR_
RESULT}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the measurement
correction method to be applied during the measurement.
measure pqr display cal.ibration
?PQR_DISPLAY_CAL?
{PQR_DCAL_RESULT}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the display
calibration parameters for PQR measurements.
measure subregion ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the use subregion
control of the measurement configuration.
measure subregion subrange
?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns whether or not
measurement subregions use the entire sequence or just a
subrange of fields.
measure subregion fields ?FIELD
FIELD?
{FIELD FIELD}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the range of fields
to be measured if both ”measure subregion” and ”measure
subregion subrange” are enabled.
measure subregion cropping
?CROPPING_PARAM...?
{CROPPING}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the CROPPING
parameters to be used for a measurement if ”measure
subregion” is enabled.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
G- 15
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
Generate commands
generate start
Starts the generator.
generate stop
Stops the generator.
genrate wait ?WAIT_REASON?
Waits for WAIT_REASON to become true. If unspecified,
waits until generate is both stopped and enabled.
generate looping ?once | continuous | count?
once | continuous | count
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the generate
looping mode.
generate seq.uence ?FORMAT?
?SEQ_NAME?
{FORMAT SEQ_NAME}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the sequence to be
generated.
generate count ?INT?
INT
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the loop count. This
only has effect if ”generate looping” is ”count”.
Results commands
results
Starts results, and waits for it to complete. Results copies all
the specified measurement results data from disk to memory,
graphs it, and makes it available to the ”panel results”
commands.
results clear
Clears the results configuration.
results add RESULT
Adds the given RESULTs to the results configuration.
results remove RESULT
Removes the given RESULTs from the results configuration.
results contains TSEQ ?RSEL...?
0|1
Returns whether the given sequence (and, if specified, the
given measurement results) are contained in the current
results configuration.
results select ?TSEQ?
?{RESULT}?
Optionally determines, and returns, which sequence in the
results configuration is to remain selected upon results
completion.
results list
{{RESULT}...}
Returns the list of results in the current results configuration.
Display-601 commands
display-601 start
Starts the display on the external 601 display monitor.
display-601 stop
Stops the display to the external 601 display monitor.
display-601 wait ?WAIT_REASON?
Waits for WAIT_REASON to become true. If unspecified,
waits until display-601 is both stopped and enabled.
display-601 source ?captured | seq.uence?
captured | sequence
Optionally sets, and returns, the source for the external 601
display monitor sequence. It may be either the currently
captured sequence, or any particular sequence.
display-601 looping
?continuous | count?
continuous | count
Optionally sets, and returns, the external 601 display monitor
looping mode.
display-601 seq.uence OPT_SEQ
{RSEQ}
Optionally sets, and returns, the external 601 display monitor
sequence to be displayed. ”display-601 source” must be
”sequence” for this to have an effect.
G- 16
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 2: PQA300 Tcl command descriptions (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
display-601 count ?INT?
INT
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the external 601
display monitor looping count. ”display-601 looping” must be
”count” for this to have an effect.
display-601 backward ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the forward/reverse
field of the external 601 display monitor configuration.
display-601 palindrome ?BOOL?
0|1
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the palindrome field
of the external 601 display monitor configuration.
Display-601 commands
Printer commands
printer
Starts the printer, and waits for it to complete printing the
current screen.
printer title ?STRING?
{STRING}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the title field of the
printer configuration.
printer header ?STRING?
{STRING}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the header field of
the printer configuration.
printer footer ?STRING?
{STRING}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the footer field of
the printer configuration.
printer comment ?STRING?
{STRING}
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the comment field
of the printer configuration.
Function commands
function start
function name ?FUN_FILE?
Executes the function specified in the current function
configuration.
FUN_FILE
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the function name
specified in the current function configuration.
function reset ?FUN_FILE?
Completely reinitializes the Tcl function interpreter, invoking
”bin/init.tcl” and ”function/initialize.tcl”, and then optionally
invoking the specified function.
function stop
Stops function execution.
function error ?STRING...?
Causes a function error that stops function execution and
generates a traceback useful for debugging.
function command pause
?MILLISECONDS?
MILLISECONDS
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Sets, if the option is supplied, and returns the number of
milliseconds that Tcl function execution pauses between
PQA300 commands. Setting MILLISECONDS to a nonzero
value slows down function execution so that intermediate
states may become more apparent, providing a better chance
to see what is going on when debugging complex functions.
The effect is similar to adding a ”pqa sleep ms” between
each pair of PQA300 Tcl commands.
G- 17
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Advanced PQA300 Tcl
Commands
The advanced commands list in Table G--3 are available for use in special
circumstances but are not normally used for running functions only.
Table G- 3: Advanced PQA300 Tcl commands
Command
Return
Description
Advanced PQA commands
pqa sync
Waits until at least all commands pending at the time of
issuance are completed by each PQA300 process.
Advanced Panel commands
panel display resolution
RESOLUTION
Returns the resolution used currently by the computer VGA
display image computations.
panel disabled
0|1
Returns whether the panel VCR controls are currently
disabled.
Advanced Capture commands
capture start
Starts capture, with function execution continuing without
waiting.
capture stop
Stops capture.
capture wait ?WAIT_REASON?
Waits for WAIT_REASON to become true. If unspecified,
waits until capture is both stopped and enabled.
capture disabled
0|1
Returns whether capture is currently disabled.
capture started
0|1
Returns whether capture is currently started
0|1
Controls the state, if the option is supplied, and returns
playback paused status.
Advanced Playback commands
playback paused ?BOOL?
playback step ?INT?
Steps playback the given number of steps, defaulting to one.
Negative steps go backwards.
playback seek (FIELD | end)
Positions playback at the indicated field, or end of sequence.
playback disabled
0|1
Returns whether playback is currently disabled.
playback started
0|1
Returns whether playback is currently started.
Advanced Measure commands
measure start
Starts measure, with function execution continuing without
waiting.
measure stop
Stops measure.
measure wait ?WAIT_REASON?
Waits for WAIT_REASON to become true. If unspecified,
waits until measure is both stopped and enabled.
measure disabled
0|1
Returns whether measure is currently disabled.
measure started
0|1
Returns whether measure is currently started.
0|1
Returns whether generate is currently disabled.
Advanced Generate commands
generate disabled
G- 18
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
Table G- 3: Advanced PQA300 Tcl commands (cont.)
Command
Return
Description
0|1
Returns whether or not generate is currently started.
Advanced Generate commands
generate started
Advanced Results commands
results start
Starts results, with function execution continuing without
waiting.
results stop
Stops results.
results wait ?WAIT_REASON?
Waits for WAIT_REASON to become true. If unspecified,
waits until results is both stopped and enabled.
results disabled
0|1
Returns whether or not results is currently disabled.
results started
0|1
Returns whether or not results is currently started.
0|1
Optionally controls, and returns, display-601 paused status.
Advanced Display-601 commands
display-601 paused ?BOOL?
display-601 step ?INT?
Steps display-601 the given number of steps, defaulting to
one. Negative steps go backwards.
display-601 seek (FIELD | end)
Positions display-601 at the indicated field, or end of
sequence.
display-601 disabled
0|1
Returns whether or not display-601 is currently disabled.
display-601 started
0|1
Returns whether or not display-601 is currently started.
Advanced Printer commands
printer start
Starts printer, with function execution continuing without
waiting.
printer stop
Stops printer.
printer wait ?WAIT_REASON?
Waits for WAIT_REASON to become true. If unspecified,
waits until printer is both stopped and enabled.
printer disabled
0|1
Returns whether or not printer feature is currently disabled.
printer started
0|1
Returns whether or not printer is currently started.
function stopping
0|1
Returns whether or not function is currently stopping. May be
useful only for nested panel query callbacks.
function disabled
0|1
Returns whether or not function is currently disabled.
Advanced Function commands
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
G- 19
Appendix G: Tcl Function Commands
G- 20
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Glossary
Glossary
Accuracy
The closeness of the indicated value to the true value.
Algorithm
A well-defined set of rules for processing data to arrive at a result in a finite
number of steps. The final result may be only a good approximation of the
exact result that can be obtained using a more rigorous and lengthy
mathematical method that either cannot be duplicated exactly by a computer
or would take excessive time to solve for an exact solution.
Analog to Digital Conversion
The process of sampling an analog signal and converting the samples to
discrete digital values that represent the analog signal.
Artifact
A term used to describe a change from the original or a defect that results
from processing a video signal.
Baseband
Refers to the composite video signal as it exists before modulating the
picture carrier. Composite video distributed throughout a studio and used for
recording is at baseband.
Block Distortion
Distortion of the received image characterized by the appearance of an
underlying block encoding structure.
CCIR 601
International Radio Consultative Committee (CCIR) Recommendation 601.
This is a standards recommendation for the formatting of digital video
signals. The CCIR 601 recommendation is now ITU--R BT 601.
Chroma (chrominance)
The color information used to create the colors seen in the display. The RGB
(red, green, and blue) color information is mathematically mixed with the
luminance (Y) information to produce the R--Y and B--Y signals sent along
with the Y signal in a video signal.
Coding
The process of converting binary data into standardized formats acceptable
for transmission.
Color Errors
Variations of the color (saturation or hue) in all or portions of the video
display from the expected values.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Glossary- 1
Glossary
Component Video Signal
A method of separating the video color (R, G, B) and luminance (Y)
information into separate channels for transmission.
Composite Coding
The composite (complete) video signal is digitized and coded into a digital
signal format.
Composite Video Signal
A video signal that has the chrominance (R, G, B) and luminance (Y) of a
video image combined with the horizontal and vertical synchronization to
provide the complete picture information in a single channel. On a waveform
monitor, a standard amplitude composite video signal in NTSC or PAL
format measures from --40 IRE to +100 IRE units sync tip to reference white
level.
Compression Artifacts
Changes or defects to a video signal that are introduced by transformation,
quantization, and transmission compression. The common defects are loss of
resolution, block errors, and quantization noise.
De-embed
The process of capturing a testing reference that contains the effects of the
system encoder and decoder and using that sequence to compare with a
captured test video sequence from a device under test. The picture difference
effects of the encoder and decoder on the video sequence are reduced, and
the added effects of the device under test are more easily identified.
Distortion
Undesired change in the signal waveform while passing through a transmission system or path.
Digital to Analog Conversion
Changing the digital values representing an analog signal back into discrete
analog amplitudes (either current or voltage values). These analog values are
further processed by filtering techniques to restore the beginning analog
signal as accurately as possible.
Frame
All the information required for a complete picture. For interlaced scan
systems, there are two fields in a frame.
Gamma
Luminance response nonlinearity in a visual display system.
Gamma Correction
The processing of a signal to achieve the desired luminance response in a
nonlinear visual display device.
Glossary- 2
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Glossary
ITU
International Telecommunications Union. A specialized agency of the United
Nations for Telecommunications whose goal is cooperation to improve the
rational use of telecommunications. Members of the organization include
governments, private companies, scientific and industrial institutions.
ITU-R BT.601
International Telecommunications Union Recommendation BT.601. Studio
encoding parameters of digital television for standard 4:3 and wide-screen
16:9 aspect ratios. ITU-R BT.601 replaced CCIR 601.
JND (Just Noticeable Difference)
A perceptually based unit of measure for the magnitude of difference
between two stimuli. In JND units, two stimuli (for example, an image
sequence and a degraded counterpart) differ by 1 JND if an observer can
discriminate between the stimuli 75% of the time. The JNDMetrix
human-vision algorithm was developed by Sarnoff Corporation and
implemented by Tektronix in the PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System.
Limits
As used in this context, the acceptable range of difference from a standard or
reference value.
Luma (luminance)
The part of the video signal that carries the brightness information used to
create the video display.
Motion-Related Artifacts
Distortion of moving video images that may be seen by a viewer. Sometimes
the distortion increases with more rapid motion in the video scene. The
distortion may be seen as smearing, block distortion, jerkiness, or other
defect.
NTSC
National Television Systems Committee. A 525 interlaced line television
system adopted by this committee. It is the accepted standard for television
signals in the United States and many other countries.
PAL
Phase Alternate Line. A 625 interlaced line television system developed and
used in Germany and adopted by other countries as a alternate television
signal standard to NTSC.
PQR
A picture quality rating number that corresponds to a subjective viewer’s
rating of picture quality. It is derived from the JND numbers obtained from
the measurements made in comparing a test reference video sequence to a
captured copy of the same video sequence.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Glossary- 3
Glossary
PQR Map
A video display of the differences between a captured video sequence and
the same reference video sequence. Differences are bright areas in the display
that indicate the location of the differences between the two sequences; the
brighter the display, the greater the difference.
PSNR (peak signal to noise ratio)
The RMS ratio between the peak signal amplitude of a signal and the noise
accompanying the signal.
Quantizing
The sampling process done to an analog signal to obtain discrete analog
values to convert to digital value representing the analog signal.
Quantizing Error/Noise
Digital values obtained from an A-to-D converter that do not accurately
reflect the analog signal values applied to the input of the converter.
RAI
Rai Radio Televisione Italiana
Rec. 601
An International Telecommunications Union recommendation for the
standardization of formatting of a digital video signal. See ITU--R BT.601.
S-Video
Separate video, also called Y/C. The luminance (Y) and the chrominance (C)
signals are sent separately to decrease the chance of crosstalk between the
two signals that is possible when they are sent as a composite signal. It also
eliminates the need to separate the Y and C signals later for the separate
processing circuitry.
Striping
The calibration pattern added to the video signal to obtain a match between
the captured video sequence and the reference video sequence for comparative analysis of the differences between the two sequences.
SVHS
See S-Video.
Termination
To accurately send a signal through a transmission line, there must be an
impedance at the end that matches the impedance of the source and of the
line itself. Amplitude errors and reflections will otherwise result. Video is a
75Ω system, so a 75Ω terminator is required at the end of the signal path.
Threshold
A level or point that divides one condition of operation or position from
another and perceptually different condition of operation or position. For
example, the black threshold is the level that divides those objects that are
Glossary- 4
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Glossary
above the threshold and visible in a display from those that are below the
threshold and are not visible.
Y/C Timing Error
The difference in timing between the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C)
information in a video signal. Errors can result in color smearing (misregistration) in the video display.
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Glossary- 5
Glossary
Glossary- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Index
Index
A
active display area, 2-- 39
Address, Tektronix, xiv
alias file name, 2-- 29
Analyzer DSP, connections, 1-- 13
applications, 1-- 3
Apply Sub-Region, 2-- 34, 3-- 15
ASCII text files, 2-- 16
Auto Measure, 2-- 28
Auto Save, 2-- 29
capture, 3-- 9
B
brightness, difference map, 2-- 70
C
Callbacks, G-- 3
capture, 3-- 17
alias file name, 2-- 29
as a reference, 3-- 22
Auto Measure, 2-- 28
Auto Save, 2-- 29, 3-- 9
capture as reference, 2-- 27
capture as test, 2-- 27
default file name, 2-- 29, 3-- 9
Save, 2-- 29
setup, 3-- 8
signal type, 2-- 26
start, 3-- 17
Tektronix sequence, 2-- 26
time out, 2-- 28, 3-- 9, 3-- 17
user configuration choices, 3-- 7
Capture Commands, G-- 14
Capture mode, 2-- 4
capture sequence, time stamp, 2-- 30
captured reference sequence, de-embedding, 3-- 20
Check for errors, in function scripts, G-- 3
clipping threshold, 3-- 34
color selection, graph traces, 2-- 51
composite video
Option 01, 1-- 12
testing, 3-- 2
testing in standard instrument, 3-- 1
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Contacting Tektronix, xiv, 1-- 24
contrast, difference map, 2-- 70
controls
arrow keys, 2-- 17
soft key, 2-- 18
virtual front panel, 2-- 17
cropping values, 2-- 38, 2-- 46
cursor, positioning, 2-- 49
D
Decoder
connections, 1-- 14
error messages, F-- 1
input selection, 2-- 30
module, 1-- 17
processing selections, 2-- 30
rear panel connections, 3-- 2
setup, 2-- 30
Decoder Commands, G-- 13
de-embedding, 3-- 20
default
display model parameters, 3-- 35
file name, 2-- 29, 3-- 9
phosphor properties, 3-- 35
signal quality parameters, 2-- 38
default file name, 2-- 29
detail results, save values to disk, 2-- 69
detected parameters, 2-- 36
directory tree, 2-- 66
disk storage space, 3-- 25
display
601 display behavior, 2-- 63
601 full screen, 2-- 63
external 601 monitor, 2-- 19, 2-- 62
external monitor mode, 2-- 10
live video mode, 2-- 9
model parameters, 3-- 32
modes, 2-- 9
results mode, 2-- 9
settings, 2-- 70
display threshold, difference map, 2-- 70
Display-601 Commands, G-- 16
DSP, module, 1-- 17
duplicate fields, 2-- 46
Index- 1
Index
E
Edge Cropping, Sub-region, 2-- 39, 3-- 15
editing a function, 2-- 56
editing of parameters, 2-- 17
emergency repair disk, 1-- 4, B-- 2
Encoder
Auto-Cal, 2-- 72
connections, 1-- 16
error messages, F-- 2
filter selection, 2-- 24
lockup selection, 2-- 24
module, 1-- 17
rear panel connections, 3-- 2
set up, 2-- 24
Encoder Commands, G-- 13
Encoder/Decoder, diagnostics, 2-- 72
error messages, F-- 1
exit, 2-- 73
external display, 2-- 19
F
factory preset, 2-- 64, 3-- 20
factory service, 1-- 24
Field range, Sub-region, 2-- 39
field service, 1-- 24
file formats, 2-- 15
file operations, 2-- 66
select network drive, 2-- 67
front panel, 2-- 17
full resolution displays, 2-- 62
Function, 2-- 16
editing, 2-- 16, 2-- 56, 3-- 31
learn mode, 3-- 28
running a function, 2-- 55, 3-- 27
Function Commands, G-- 17
function files, samples, 3-- 29
G
gamma, 3-- 34
generate
behavior, 2-- 24
configuration, 3-- 5
format, 2-- 23
start, 3-- 17
video test sequence, 2-- 23
Generate Commands, G-- 16
Generator DSP, connections, 1-- 15
genlock source, 2-- 25, 3-- 3, 3-- 7
Grammar, Tcl Commands, G-- 4
Index- 2
graph legend, 2-- 65
positioning, 2-- 51
resizing, 2-- 51
turning on and off, 2-- 50
graph trace, color selection, 2-- 51
graph traces, 2-- 51
active trace selection, 2-- 53
H
Hardware Settings, 2-- 71
Header Only, signal quality measurement, 2-- 8
Header Plus, signal quality measurement, 2-- 8
Help Menu, 2-- 72
horizontal expansion, graph display, 2-- 50
I
impaired video test sequences, C-- 6, C-- 19
initialize.tcl, G-- 2
Installation, 1-- 7
application software, B-- 12
test sequences, B-- 12
J
JND, definition, 2-- 6
K
keyboard, 2-- 17
keyboard arrow keys, cursor positioning, 2-- 49
L
Learn mode, 2-- 55
functions, 3-- 28
using, 3-- 28
limits, 2-- 35
in results graph, 2-- 35
in tables, 2-- 35
incompatible settings, 3-- 13
Luma and Luma & Chroma measurement, 3-- 13
login, Administrator, 1-- 22
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Index
M
N
manual contents, preface, xiii
Manual Correction, signal quality parameters, 2-- 38
Manual Corrections, 2-- 37
manual save, 2-- 29
maximum luminance, 3-- 34
measure
default test sequence, 3-- 12
display model parameters, 3-- 32
limits, 2-- 35
limits selection, 3-- 13
Picture Quality Measurement, 2-- 33
picture quality test selection, 3-- 12
signal conditioning, 2-- 34, 3-- 14
signal quality, 2-- 34
test sequence, 2-- 33
test sequence selection, 3-- 12
Measure Commands, G-- 15
Measure mode, 2-- 5
Auto Measure, 2-- 5
non-Auto Measure, 2-- 5
measurement results, 2-- 45
Measurement Results Display Mode, 2-- 9
menus
accessing, 2-- 21
Capture Configuration, 2-- 25
Decoder Configuration, 2-- 30
Encoder Configuration, 2-- 24
External 601 Display Configuration, 2-- 62
File Operations, 2-- 66
Function Configuration, 2-- 55
Generate Configuration, 2-- 22
Help, 2-- 72
Measure Configuration, 2-- 32
Other choices, 2-- 65
Playback Configuration, 2-- 41
PQR Parameters, 2-- 34
Preference Configuration, 2-- 63
Print Configuration, 2-- 58
PSNR Parameters, 2-- 35
Results Configuration, 2-- 44
Select Network Drive, 2-- 67
Setup Configuration, preferences, 2-- 64
Sub-Region Configuration, 2-- 39
Working Directory, 2-- 65
messages, 2-- 73
Capture mode, 2-- 74
Configuration errors, 2-- 74
Measure mode, 2-- 74
minimize, 2-- 73
missing fields, 2-- 46
No disk space, 3-- 25
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
O
Option 01
decoder, 1-- 17, 2-- 30
encoder, 1-- 17
encoder and decoder modules, 3-- 2
Other choices
display settings, 2-- 70
file operations, 2-- 66
hardware settings, 2-- 71
help menu, 2-- 72
minimize, exit, and about, 2-- 73
recompute database, 2-- 68
save values to disk, 2-- 69
select network drive, 2-- 67
view graph legend, 2-- 65
view transcript, 2-- 65
view video controls, 2-- 65
working directory, 2-- 65
Other soft key, 2-- 65
P
Packaging for shipment, D-- 2
Packaging replacement, D-- 2
page setup, formatting codes, 2-- 61
Panel Callback Commands, G-- 12
Panel Commands, G-- 10
Panel Results Commands, G-- 12
Panel Sequence Commands, G-- 12
parameters, display model, advanced PQR, 3-- 32
performance, 2-- 2
Phone number, Tektronix, xiv
phosphor properties, 3-- 35
picture quality, testing, 3-- 1
playback
behavior, 2-- 42
controls, 2-- 42
field number, 2-- 42
sequence selection, 2-- 42
Playback Commands, G-- 14
power cord options, 1-- 5
power on, 1-- 21
PQA Callback Commands, G-- 10
PQA Display Commands, G-- 10
PQA Execution Commands, G-- 8
PQA Filename Commands, G-- 9
Index- 3
Index
PQA Files Commands, G-- 9
PQA Hardware Commands, G-- 10
PQA Sequence Commands, G-- 10
PQA 200 I/O Ports, 1-- 12
PQR, as derived from JND, 2-- 6
PQR parameter settings, 3-- 13
Preference Commands, G-- 13
preferences
active, 2-- 64
save, 2-- 64
setups, 2-- 16
preprocessing, 2-- 8
print
format selection, 2-- 58
page setup, 2-- 60
properties, 2-- 59
Printer Commands, G-- 17
printing, reports, 2-- 15
product description, 1-- 1
Product support, contact information, xiv
program monitor, clock, 1-- 22
prompts, 2-- 73
PSNR measurement, 2-- 7
R
Rackmount installation, 1-- 8
Recompute Database, 2-- 68
reference information, color and gamma, 3-- 34
region of interest, in a picture difference map, 2-- 54
Repacking for shipment, D-- 1–D-- 6
repair disk utility, B-- 2
report printing, 2-- 15
results
clear selections, 2-- 45
details, 2-- 47
displays, 2-- 20
graph, 2-- 49
interpreting, 3-- 17
Luma or Luma & Chroma, 3-- 19
measurement data, 2-- 47
picture quality measurements, 2-- 45
sequence selections, 2-- 45
setup, 3-- 19
signal quality data, 2-- 48
summary, 2-- 46
video displays, 2-- 53
viewing, 2-- 45, 3-- 18
Results Commands, G-- 16
results text files, 2-- 16
ROI, 2-- 54
Index- 4
S
sample function files, 3-- 29
save results.tcl, 3-- 30
save to disk, 3-- 25
Save Values to Disk, 2-- 16, 2-- 69
save as, 2-- 69
security, B-- 1
select network drive, 2-- 67
self-diagnostics, 1-- 24
Service support, contact information, xiv
setups, 2-- 16
Shipping, D-- 1
shutdown, B-- 1
signal conditioning, 2-- 34, 3-- 14
detected correction, 2-- 34
signal quality, 2-- 7, 2-- 34
data, 2-- 48
limits, 2-- 36
Signal Quality Measurement
Header Only, 2-- 8
Header Plus, 2-- 8
preprocessing selection, 2-- 8
signal quality parameters
manual correction, 2-- 37
use detected parameters, 2-- 36
soft keys
behavior, 2-- 18
menu, 2-- 18
two selections, 2-- 18
software, installation, B-- 12
stable system, sequence selection, 2-- 23
status bar, progress indicator, 2-- 73
storage, results, 2-- 15
Sub-Region, parameters, 3-- 15
Sub-region, configuration menu, 2-- 39
summary results, save values to disk, 2-- 69
system error messages, F-- 4
system time setting, 1-- 22
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Index
T
task list, B-- 1
Tcl Commands
Callbacks, G-- 3
Capture, G-- 14
Advanced, G-- 18
Check for errors, G-- 3
Decoder, G-- 13
Display-601, G-- 16
Advanced, G-- 19
Encoder, G-- 13
Function, G-- 17
Advanced, G-- 19
Generate, G-- 16
Advanced, G-- 18
Measure, G-- 15
Advanced, G-- 18
Panel, G-- 10
Advanced, G-- 18
Panel Callback, G-- 12
Panel Results, G-- 12
Panel Sequence, G-- 12
Playback, G-- 14
Advanced, G-- 18
PQA Callback, G-- 10
PQA Commands, Advanced, G-- 18
PQA Display, G-- 10
PQA Execution, G-- 8
PQA Filename, G-- 9
PQA Files, G-- 9
PQA Hardware, G-- 10
PQA Sequence, G-- 10
Preference, G-- 13
Printer, G-- 17
Advanced, G-- 19
Results, G-- 16
Advanced, G-- 19
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual
Tcl Grammar, G-- 4
Technical support, contact information, xiv
Tektronix, contacting, xiv
test equipment, for functional check, C-- 1
test sequence
composition, 2-- 12
Header Only, 2-- 12
Header Plus, 2-- 13
installation, 1-- 23, B-- 12
selection, 3-- 5
type, 2-- 10
test values, impaired video test sequences, C-- 6, C-- 19
text editing, 2-- 17
time out, 2-- 28, 3-- 9
transcript, 2-- 65
transferring files, 2-- 66
U
URL, Tektronix, xiv
User Interface soft keys, 2-- 18
User Sequence, Capture As, 2-- 28
V
Video Controls, 2-- 65
for playback, 2-- 43
video sequences, 2-- 20
W
Web site address, Tektronix, xiv
Windows NT, 1-- 1
security dialog box, B-- 1
working directory, 2-- 65
Index- 5
Index
Index- 6
PQA300 Picture Quality Analysis System User Manual